You are on page 1of 265

BBU3900 V100R003

Hardware Description
Issue Date 03 2010-10-25

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com

Website: Email:

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BBU3900 Hardware Description

About This Document

About This Document


Purpose
This document describes the BBU3900 hardware, such as boards, module, ports, cables, and connectors, and the functions of the hardware.

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name BBU3900 Version V100R003

Intended Audience
The intended audiences of this document are: l l l Install engineers Field engineers System engineers

Organization
1 Changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description This provides the changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description. 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets 3 Configurations of the Matched Cabinets When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors, multiple matched cabinets must be configured to meet the backup power, transmission, and capacity requirements. Different types of cabinet can be combined to form the DBS3900, providing multiple outdoor solutions.
Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

About This Document

BBU3900 Hardware Description

4 Transmission Board Configurations In different modes, different transmission boards can be configured for E1/T1 or FE signal transmission. 5 CPRI Port Configurations The CPRI port configurations involves the specifications and configuration principles of the CPRI ports on the BBU and RRU. 6 DBS3900 Monitoring System The DBS3900 monitoring system enables monitoring of all boards and components in the cabinet. If any board or component is faulty, an alarm is automatically reported. The UPEU and UEIU in the BBU or the RRU collects monitoring signals from boards and components to achieve environment monitoring of the DBS3900. 7 BBU3900 Equipment This describes the BBU3900 equipment in terms of the appearance, boards and their panels, module, LEDs, ports, and engineering specifications. 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900 The connections of the CPRI cables, transmission cables, and monitoring signal cables of the DBS3900 vary according to the external input power and combinations of the cabinet configured in the DBS3900. 9 BBU3900 Cables This describes the cables of the BBU3900 in terms of their appearance, pin assignment, and installation positions. 10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900 This describes the auxiliary devices of the BBU3900. The devices consist of the EMUA and SLPU.

Conventions
Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided,will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided,could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results.
iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

About This Document

Symbol

Description Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Book titles are in italics. Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.

Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface Italic [] { x | y | ... } [ x | y | ... ] { x | y | ... }* Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command arguments are in italics. Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

About This Document

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Convention Boldface >

Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Format Key Key 1+Key 2 Key 1, Key 2 Description Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab. Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt +A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently. Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Action Click Double-click Drag Description Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer. Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer. Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.

vi

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Contents

Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii 1 Changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description........................................................................1-1 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets.....................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Module Configurations in the DBS3900 Cabinets..........................................................................................2-4 2.2 Board Configurations of the BBU3900.........................................................................................................2-25 2.3 Configuration of the SLPU...........................................................................................................................2-33

3 Configurations of the Matched Cabinets..............................................................................3-1 4 Transmission Board Configurations......................................................................................4-1 5 CPRI Port Configurations.........................................................................................................5-1
5.1 CPRI Port Specifications.................................................................................................................................5-2 5.2 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports in the UMTS Only Base Station...............................................5-3 5.3 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports in the GSM Only Base Station.................................................5-4 5.4 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports in the GSM+UMTS Base Station.............................................5-5 5.5 Principles for Configuring the CPRI Ports in the LO Base Station................................................................5-5 5.6 Principles for Configuring the CPRI Ports in the GL Base Station ...............................................................5-6 5.7 Principles for Configuring the CPRI Ports in the UL Base Station................................................................5-7

6 DBS3900 Monitoring System...................................................................................................6-1


6.1 BBU Monitoring Port......................................................................................................................................6-2 6.2 Monitoring Principles of the Cabinets............................................................................................................6-3 6.3 Customized Alarm Input.................................................................................................................................6-7

7 BBU3900 Equipment..................................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Exterior of the BBU3900................................................................................................................................7-2 7.2 Boards and Module of the BBU3900..............................................................................................................7-3 7.2.1 WMPT....................................................................................................................................................7-4 7.2.2 GTMU....................................................................................................................................................7-8 7.2.3 LMPT...................................................................................................................................................7-14 7.2.4 WBBP...................................................................................................................................................7-17 7.2.5 LBBP....................................................................................................................................................7-20 7.2.6 FAN......................................................................................................................................................7-22 7.2.7 UPEU...................................................................................................................................................7-23 Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

Contents

BBU3900 Hardware Description 7.2.8 UEIU....................................................................................................................................................7-26 7.2.9 UTRP....................................................................................................................................................7-27 7.2.10 USCU.................................................................................................................................................7-33 7.2.11 UBRI..................................................................................................................................................7-35

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900........................................................................................8-1


8.1 Power Cable Connections...............................................................................................................................8-2 8.2 Transmission Cable Connections..................................................................................................................8-11 8.2.1 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM Only Base Station.........................................8-14 8.2.2 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM Only Base Station............................................8-16 8.2.3 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor UMTS Only Base Station......................................8-17 8.2.4 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor UMTS Only Base Station.........................................8-20 8.2.5 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor LTE Only Base Station..........................................8-23 8.2.6 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor LTE Only Base Station.............................................8-24 8.2.7 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode .......................................................................................................................................................................8-25 8.2.8 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode .......................................................................................................................................................................8-28 8.2.9 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode..............................................................................................................................................................8-31 8.2.10 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode..............................................................................................................................................................8-33 8.2.11 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Route Backup Transmission Mode.......................................................................................................................................8-34 8.2.12 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Route Backup Transmission Mode.......................................................................................................................................8-36 8.2.13 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode .......................................................................................................................................................................8-38 8.2.14 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode .......................................................................................................................................................................8-41 8.2.15 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode..............................................................................................................................................................8-43 8.2.16 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode .......................................................................................................................................................................8-47 8.2.17 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Route Backup Transmission Mode..............................................................................................................................................................8-50 8.2.18 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Route Backup Transmission Mode..............................................................................................................................................................8-52 8.2.19 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode .......................................................................................................................................................................8-53 8.2.20 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode .......................................................................................................................................................................8-56 8.2.21 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode..............................................................................................................................................................8-58 8.2.22 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode .......................................................................................................................................................................8-62

viii

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Contents

8.2.23 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Route Backup Transmission Mode..............................................................................................................................................................8-65 8.2.24 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Route Backup Transmission Mode..............................................................................................................................................................8-67 8.2.25 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Hybrid Transmission Mode .......................................................................................................................................................................8-69 8.2.26 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Hybrid Transmission Mode .......................................................................................................................................................................8-70 8.3 CPRI Cable Connections...............................................................................................................................8-72 8.3.1 CPRI Cable Connection in the UMTS Only Base Station...................................................................8-72 8.3.2 CPRI Cable Connection in the GSM Only Base Station.....................................................................8-73 8.3.3 CPRI Cable Connections in the GSM+UMTS Base Station................................................................8-74 8.3.4 CPRI Cable Connection in the LO Base Station..................................................................................8-76 8.3.5 CPRI Cable Connections in the GL Base Station................................................................................8-78 8.3.6 CPRI Cable Connections in the a UL Base Station.............................................................................8-80 8.4 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections..........................................................................................................8-81

9 BBU3900 Cables..........................................................................................................................9-1
9.1 List of BBU3900 Cables.................................................................................................................................9-3 9.2 PGND Cable....................................................................................................................................................9-5 9.3 BBU Power Cable...........................................................................................................................................9-6 9.4 BBU Power cable(OMB)................................................................................................................................9-7 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.....................................................................................................................................................9-8 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable........................................................................................................9-11 9.7 FE/GE Cable.................................................................................................................................................9-12 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable.......................................................................................................9-13 9.9 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports.......................................................................................................9-14 9.10 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.........................................................................................................9-14 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable...................................................................................................................................9-15 9.12 CPRI Optical Cable.....................................................................................................................................9-16 9.13 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the APMI and the BBU.......................................................................9-18 9.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the HEUA and the BBU......................................................................9-19 9.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU.....................................................................9-20 9.16 EMUA Monitoring Signal Cable................................................................................................................9-21 9.17 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC).........................................................................................9-22 9.18 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)..........................................................................................9-22 9.19 BBU Alarm Cable.......................................................................................................................................9-23 9.20 GPS Clock Signal Cable.............................................................................................................................9-25

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900......................................................................................10-1


10.1 EMUA.........................................................................................................................................................10-2 10.2 OMB............................................................................................................................................................10-2 10.3 IMB03.........................................................................................................................................................10-6 10.4 DCDU-03....................................................................................................................................................10-9 10.5 AC/DC Power Equipment.........................................................................................................................10-11 Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

Contents

BBU3900 Hardware Description

10.6 SLPU.........................................................................................................................................................10-15 10.6.1 Exterior of SLPU..............................................................................................................................10-15 10.6.2 UELP................................................................................................................................................10-15 10.6.3 UFLP................................................................................................................................................10-17 10.6.4 USLP2..............................................................................................................................................10-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figures

Figures
Figure 2-1 Exteriors of the cabinets.....................................................................................................................2-2 Figure 2-2 Module configurations in the APM series cabinets............................................................................2-4 Figure 2-3 TMC series cabinets (1)......................................................................................................................2-9 Figure 2-4 TMC series cabinets (2)......................................................................................................................2-9 Figure 2-5 Module configurations in the battery cabinets..................................................................................2-15 Figure 2-6 Component configuration of the OMB.............................................................................................2-21 Figure 2-7 Slots in the BBU3900.......................................................................................................................2-25 Figure 2-8 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in GO mode.......................................................................2-26 Figure 2-9 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in UO mode.......................................................................2-28 Figure 2-10 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in LO mode......................................................................2-29 Figure 2-11 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in GU mode.....................................................................2-30 Figure 2-12 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in GL mode......................................................................2-32 Figure 2-13 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in UL mode......................................................................2-33 Figure 2-14 Slots of the SLPU...........................................................................................................................2-34 Figure 3-1 Configurations of the cabinets when backup power is not required...................................................3-2 Figure 3-2 Configurations of the cabinets when 184 Ah/48 V backup power is required...................................3-3 Figure 3-3 Configurations of the cabinets when 368 Ah/48 V backup power is required...................................3-4 Figure 3-4 Configurations of the OMB................................................................................................................3-4 Figure 3-5 1 TMC.................................................................................................................................................3-5 Figure 3-6 1 primary TMC+1 extension TMC.....................................................................................................3-5 Figure 3-7 1 TMC with two built-in DCDUs.......................................................................................................3-5 Figure 3-8 1 primary TMC+1 extension TMC with two built-in DCDUs...........................................................3-6 Figure 3-9 Configurations of the OMB................................................................................................................3-6 Figure 5-1 Basic CPRI port connection principles...............................................................................................5-4 Figure 5-2 Basic CPRI port connection principles...............................................................................................5-4 Figure 5-3 Basic CPRI port connection principles...............................................................................................5-5 Figure 5-4 Basic principles for configuring the CPRI port connection................................................................5-6 Figure 5-5 Basic principles for configuring the CPRI port connection................................................................5-7 Figure 5-6 Basic principles for configuring the CPRI port connection................................................................5-7 Figure 6-1 Slot assignment for the UPEU and UEIU.......................................................................................... 6-2 Figure 6-2 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30............................6-3 Figure 6-3 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.A)...........6-4 Figure 6-4 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B)........... 6-4 Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi

Figures

BBU3900 Hardware Description Figure 6-5 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B)........... 6-5 Figure 6-6 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the RRU is powered and monitored by the APM30H (Ver.B)...................................................................................................................................................................6-5 Figure 6-7 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the OMB...............................6-5

Figure 6-8 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+ICR (110V/220V) scenario...................6-6 Figure 6-9 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+IMB03 (110V/220V) scenario..............6-6 Figure 6-10 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the TMC or TMC11H.........6-6 Figure 6-11 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the OMB.............................6-7 Figure 6-12 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 DC power supply scenario....................................................................................................................................6-7 Figure 6-13 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+ICR (+24 V DC) scenario...................6-7 Figure 6-14 Customized alarms collected by the UPEU or UEIU.......................................................................6-8 Figure 6-15 Customized alarms collected by the EMUA (1)...............................................................................6-9 Figure 6-16 Customized alarms collected by the EMUA (2).............................................................................6-10 Figure 7-1 BBU3900............................................................................................................................................7-2 Figure 7-2 The position of the ESN (1)................................................................................................................7-2 Figure 7-3 The position of the ESN (2)................................................................................................................7-3 Figure 7-4 Panel of the WMPT............................................................................................................................7-4 Figure 7-5 LEDs beside the three ports on the WMPT........................................................................................7-5 Figure 7-6 DIP switches on the WMPT...............................................................................................................7-7 Figure 7-7 GTMU panel.......................................................................................................................................7-8 Figure 7-8 GTMUb panel.....................................................................................................................................7-9 Figure 7-9 Panel of the LMPT...........................................................................................................................7-14 Figure 7-10 Panel of the WBBPa.......................................................................................................................7-17 Figure 7-11 Panel of the WBBPb.......................................................................................................................7-17 Figure 7-12 Panel of the WBBPd.......................................................................................................................7-17 Figure 7-13 Panel of the LBBP..........................................................................................................................7-20 Figure 7-14 Panel of the LBBP..........................................................................................................................7-20 Figure 7-15 Panel of the FAN unit.....................................................................................................................7-23 Figure 7-16 Panel of the UPEUA.......................................................................................................................7-24 Figure 7-17 Panel of the UPEUB.......................................................................................................................7-24 Figure 7-18 Slots in the BBU.............................................................................................................................7-25 Figure 7-19 Panel of the UEIU...........................................................................................................................7-26 Figure 7-20 Panel of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports..........................................................................7-28 Figure 7-21 Panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4 supporting eight E1s/T1s.........................................7-28 Figure 7-22 Panel of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1 .................................................................................7-28 Figure 7-23 Panel of the UTRP supporting four electrical ports........................................................................7-28 Figure 7-24 DIP switch on the UTRP3 or UTRP4.............................................................................................7-31 Figure 7-25 DIP switch on the UTRPb4............................................................................................................7-31 Figure 7-26 Panel of the USCUb1 (0.5 U).........................................................................................................7-33 Figure 7-27 Panel of the USCUb2 (1 U)............................................................................................................7-33 Figure 7-28 Panel of the UBRI...........................................................................................................................7-35 Figure 8-1 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30+1 TMC+1 BBC.........8-2 xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figures

Figure 8-2 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 BBC....................................................................................................................................................8-3 Figure 8-3 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 IBBS200T...........................................................................................................................................8-4 Figure 8-4 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+1 IBBS200D...........................................................................................................................................8-5 Figure 8-5 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+1 IBBS200T...........................................................................................................................................8-6 Figure 8-6 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+2 IBBS200D...........................................................................................................................................8-7 Figure 8-7 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+2 IBBS200T...........................................................................................................................................8-8 Figure 8-8 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMCs.............................................8-9 Figure 8-9 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. A)......................8-10 Figure 8-10 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. B)....................8-10 Figure 8-11 E1/T1 cable connections.................................................................................................................8-14 Figure 8-12 E1/T1 cable connections.................................................................................................................8-14 Figure 8-13 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections.................................................................................................8-15 Figure 8-14 FE/GE optical cable connections....................................................................................................8-15 Figure 8-15 E1/T1 cable connections.................................................................................................................8-16 Figure 8-16 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections.................................................................................................8-16 Figure 8-17 FE/GE optical cable connections....................................................................................................8-17 Figure 8-18 E1/T1 cable connections (1)...........................................................................................................8-17 Figure 8-19 E1/T1 cable connections (2)...........................................................................................................8-18 Figure 8-20 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1)...........................................................................................8-18 Figure 8-21 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2)...........................................................................................8-19 Figure 8-22 FE/GE optical cable connections (1)..............................................................................................8-19 Figure 8-23 FE/GE optical cable connections (2)..............................................................................................8-20 Figure 8-24 E1/T1 cable connections (1)...........................................................................................................8-20 Figure 8-25 E1/T1 cable connections (2)...........................................................................................................8-21 Figure 8-26 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1)...........................................................................................8-21 Figure 8-27 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2)...........................................................................................8-22 Figure 8-28 FE/GE optical cable connections (1)..............................................................................................8-22 Figure 8-29 FE/GE optical cable connections (2)..............................................................................................8-22 Figure 8-30 E1/T1 cable connections.................................................................................................................8-23 Figure 8-31 FE/GE optical cable connections....................................................................................................8-23 Figure 8-32 E1/T1 cable connections.................................................................................................................8-24 Figure 8-33 FE/GE optical cable connections....................................................................................................8-24 Figure 8-34 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTS base station (1) .............................................................................................................................................................................8-25 Figure 8-35 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTS base station (2) .............................................................................................................................................................................8-26 Figure 8-36 E1/T1 cable connections in IP co-transmission mode....................................................................8-26 Figure 8-37 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections in IP co-transmission mode....................................................8-27 Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii

Figures

BBU3900 Hardware Description Figure 8-38 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (1).................................................8-27

Figure 8-39 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (2).................................................8-28 Figure 8-40 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTS base station (1) .............................................................................................................................................................................8-28 Figure 8-41 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTS base station (2) .............................................................................................................................................................................8-29 Figure 8-42 E1/T1 cable connections in IP co-transmission mode....................................................................8-30 Figure 8-43 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections in IP co-transmission mode....................................................8-30 Figure 8-44 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (1).................................................8-30 Figure 8-45 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (2).................................................8-31 Figure 8-46 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM E1/T1+UMTS E1/T1 mode............... 8-32 Figure 8-47 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GE mode (1)........8-32 Figure 8-48 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GE mode (2)........8-33 Figure 8-49 E1/T1 cable connections in separate transmission mode............................................................... 8-33 Figure 8-50 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (1).........................................................8-34 Figure 8-51 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (2).........................................................8-34 Figure 8-52 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the transport network..................................................................................................................... 8-35 Figure 8-53 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the transport network..................................................................................................................... 8-36 Figure 8-54 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the transport network..................................................................................................................... 8-37 Figure 8-55 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the transport network..................................................................................................................... 8-38 Figure 8-56 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT for data transmission.........................................................................................................................................................8-38 Figure 8-57 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPT for data transmission .............................................................................................................................................................................8-39 Figure 8-58 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (1)........................................................................................................................................................................8-39 Figure 8-59 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (2)........................................................................................................................................................................8-40 Figure 8-60 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT for data transmission.........................................................................................................................................................8-41 Figure 8-61 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPT for data transmission .............................................................................................................................................................................8-41 Figure 8-62 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (1)........................................................................................................................................................................8-42 Figure 8-63 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (2)........................................................................................................................................................................8-42 Figure 8-64 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1).......... 8-43 Figure 8-65 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2).......... 8-44 Figure 8-66 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1).......... 8-44 Figure 8-67 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2).......... 8-45 Figure 8-68 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1)........... 8-46 Figure 8-69 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2)........... 8-46 xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figures

Figure 8-70 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)..........8-47 Figure 8-71 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)..........8-47 Figure 8-72 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)..........8-48 Figure 8-73 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)..........8-48 Figure 8-74 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1)...........8-49 Figure 8-75 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2)...........8-49 Figure 8-76 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-51 Figure 8-77 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-51 Figure 8-78 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-52 Figure 8-79 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-53 Figure 8-80 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT for data transmission.........................................................................................................................................................8-54 Figure 8-81 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPT for data transmission .............................................................................................................................................................................8-54 Figure 8-82 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (1)........................................................................................................................................................................8-55 Figure 8-83 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (2)........................................................................................................................................................................8-55 Figure 8-84 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT for data transmission.........................................................................................................................................................8-56 Figure 8-85 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPT for data transmission .............................................................................................................................................................................8-57 Figure 8-86 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (1)........................................................................................................................................................................8-57 Figure 8-87 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (2)........................................................................................................................................................................8-58 Figure 8-88 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)........8-58 Figure 8-89 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)........8-59 Figure 8-90 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)........8-60 Figure 8-91 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)........8-60 Figure 8-92 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1).........8-61 Figure 8-93 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2).........8-61 Figure 8-94 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)........8-62 Figure 8-95 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)........8-63 Figure 8-96 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)........8-63 Figure 8-97 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)........8-64 Figure 8-98 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1).........8-64 Figure 8-99 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2).........8-65 Figure 8-100 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-66 Figure 8-101 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-66 Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xv

Figures

BBU3900 Hardware Description Figure 8-102 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the transport network..................................................................................................................... 8-68 Figure 8-103 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the transport network..................................................................................................................... 8-68 Figure 8-104 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE electrical port).....................................................................................................................................................................8-69 Figure 8-105 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE optical port).....................................................................................................................................................................8-70 Figure 8-106 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE electrical port).....................................................................................................................................................................8-71 Figure 8-107 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE optical port).....................................................................................................................................................................8-71 Figure 8-108 CPRI cable connections (1)..........................................................................................................8-72 Figure 8-109 CPRI cable connections (2)..........................................................................................................8-73 Figure 8-110 CPRI cable connections (3)..........................................................................................................8-73 Figure 8-111 CPRI cable connections (1)..........................................................................................................8-74 Figure 8-112 CPRI cable connections (2)..........................................................................................................8-74 Figure 8-113 CPRI cable connections (1)..........................................................................................................8-75 Figure 8-114 CPRI cable connections (2)..........................................................................................................8-75 Figure 8-115 CPRI cable connections (3)..........................................................................................................8-76 Figure 8-116 CPRI cable connections (4)..........................................................................................................8-76 Figure 8-117 CPRI cable connections (1)..........................................................................................................8-77 Figure 8-118 CPRI cable connections (2)..........................................................................................................8-77 Figure 8-119 CPRI cable connections (3)..........................................................................................................8-78 Figure 8-120 CPRI cable connections (1)..........................................................................................................8-78 Figure 8-121 CPRI cable connections (2)..........................................................................................................8-79 Figure 8-122 CPRI cable connections (3)..........................................................................................................8-79 Figure 8-123 CPRI cable connections (4)..........................................................................................................8-79 Figure 8-124 CPRI cable connections (1)..........................................................................................................8-80 Figure 8-125 CPRI cable connections (2)..........................................................................................................8-80 Figure 8-126 CPRI cable connections (3)..........................................................................................................8-81 Figure 8-127 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30+1 TMC+1 BBC.....................................................................................................................................................................8-82 Figure 8-128 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A) +1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 BBC............................................................................................................................ 8-83 Figure 8-129 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A) +1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 IBBS200T...................................................................................................................8-84 Figure 8-130 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T......................................................................................................8-85 Figure 8-131 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 2 APM30H (Ver. A) +1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+2 BBC............................................................................................................................ 8-86 Figure 8-132 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 2 APM30H (Ver. A) +1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+2 IBBS200T...................................................................................................................8-87 Figure 8-133 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+2 IBBS200D/IBBS200T......................................................................................................8-88

xvi

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figures

Figure 8-134 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 2 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+4 IBBS200D/IBBS200T......................................................................................................8-89 Figure 8-135 Monitoring cable connections of a base station configured with one OMB in the AC power supply scenario................................................................................................................................................................8-89 Figure 8-136 Monitoring cable connections of a base station configured with two TMCs...............................8-90 Figure 8-137 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. A) .............................................................................................................................................................................8-91 Figure 8-138 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. B) .............................................................................................................................................................................8-91 Figure 8-139 Monitoring cable connections of a base station configured with one OMB in the DC power supply scenario................................................................................................................................................................8-92 Figure 9-1 PGND cable........................................................................................................................................9-6 Figure 9-2 BBU power cable (1)..........................................................................................................................9-6 Figure 9-3 BBU power cable (2)..........................................................................................................................9-7 Figure 9-4 Appearance of power cable(AC OMB)..............................................................................................9-8 Figure 9-5 Appearance of power cable(DC OMB)..............................................................................................9-8 Figure 9-6 E1/T1 cable.........................................................................................................................................9-9 Figure 9-7 E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable...............................................................................................9-11 Figure 9-8 FE/GE cable......................................................................................................................................9-12 Figure 9-9 FE/GE surge protection transfer cable..............................................................................................9-13 Figure 9-10 Cable between two FE electrical ports...........................................................................................9-14 Figure 9-11 Cable between two FE optical ports...............................................................................................9-15 Figure 9-12 FE/GE optical cable (FC and LC connectors)................................................................................9-15 Figure 9-13 FE/GE optical cable (SC and LC connectors)................................................................................9-15 Figure 9-14 FE/GE optical cable (LC and LC connectors)................................................................................9-15 Figure 9-15 Multi-mode optical cable ...............................................................................................................9-16 Figure 9-16 Single-mode optical cable..............................................................................................................9-16 Figure 9-17 Monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU.............................................................9-18 Figure 9-18 Monitoring signal cable between the HEUA and the BBU............................................................9-19 Figure 9-19 Monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU...........................................................9-20 Figure 9-20 EMUA monitoring signal cable......................................................................................................9-21 Figure 9-21 Monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)..............................................................................9-22 Figure 9-22 In-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)...............................................................................9-23 Figure 9-23 BBU alarm cable............................................................................................................................9-24 Figure 9-24 GPS clock signal cable...................................................................................................................9-25 Figure 10-1 Appearance of the OMB(Unit: mm)...............................................................................................10-2 Figure 10-2 Hardware structure of the AC OMB...............................................................................................10-4 Figure 10-3 Hardware structure of the DC OMB...............................................................................................10-5 Figure 10-4 IMB03.............................................................................................................................................10-6 Figure 10-5 DC IMB03......................................................................................................................................10-7 Figure 10-6 AC IMB03......................................................................................................................................10-8 Figure 10-7 DCDU-03........................................................................................................................................10-9 Figure 10-8 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-03..............................................................................................10-10 Figure 10-9 AC/DC power equipment.............................................................................................................10-11 Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvii

Figures

BBU3900 Hardware Description Figure 10-10 DIP switches on the PMU..........................................................................................................10-14

Figure 10-11 SLPU..........................................................................................................................................10-15 Figure 10-12 UELP panel.................................................................................................................................10-16 Figure 10-13 DIP switch on the UELP............................................................................................................10-16 Figure 10-14 Panel of the UFLP......................................................................................................................10-17 Figure 10-15 Panel of the USLP2....................................................................................................................10-18 Figure 10-16 Mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2................10-18

xviii

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Tables

Tables
Table 2-1 Functions of the components in the APM series cabinets....................................................................2-5 Table 2-2 Functions of the components in the TMC series cabinets..................................................................2-10 Table 2-3 Functions of the components in the battery cabinets.........................................................................2-15 Table 2-4 Functions of the OMB........................................................................................................................2-22 Table 2-5 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in GO mode.................................................2-25 Table 2-6 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in UO mode.................................................2-26 Table 2-7 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in LO mode................................................. 2-28 Table 2-8 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in GU mode.................................................2-29 Table 2-9 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in GL mode................................................. 2-31 Table 2-10 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in UL mode............................................... 2-32 Table 2-11 Configuration principles of the SLPU (1)........................................................................................2-34 Table 2-12 Configuration principles of the SLPU (2)........................................................................................2-34 Table 4-1 Transmission modes supported by the boards.....................................................................................4-1 Table 5-1 Specifications of the CPRI ports on the BBU......................................................................................5-2 Table 5-2 Specifications of the CPRI ports on the RRU......................................................................................5-2 Table 6-1 Ports on the UPEU and UEIU..............................................................................................................6-2 Table 6-2 Configurations of monitoring boards in the DBS3900........................................................................6-8 Table 6-3 Relationship between the IN0 to IN3 ports on the USLP2 and the number of customized alarms ...............................................................................................................................................................................6-9 Table 7-1 LEDs on the WMPT panel...................................................................................................................7-5 Table 7-2 LEDs and their status...........................................................................................................................7-6 Table 7-3 Ports on the WMPT panel....................................................................................................................7-6 Table 7-4 Settings of SW1....................................................................................................................................7-7 Table 7-5 Settings of SW2....................................................................................................................................7-8 Table 7-6 LEDs on the GTMU.............................................................................................................................7-9 Table 7-7 LEDs and their status.........................................................................................................................7-10 Table 7-8 Ports on the GTMU............................................................................................................................7-11 Table 7-9 Details of the DIP Switch S1............................................................................................................. 7-12 Table 7-10 Details of the DIP Switch S2........................................................................................................... 7-13 Table 7-11 Details of the DIP Switch S4........................................................................................................... 7-13 Table 7-12 Details of the DIP Switch S5........................................................................................................... 7-13 Table 7-13 LEDs on the LMPT..........................................................................................................................7-15 Table 7-14 LEDs and their status.......................................................................................................................7-15 Table 7-15 Ports on the LMPT...........................................................................................................................7-16 Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xix

Tables

BBU3900 Hardware Description Table 7-16 Specifications of the WBBP.............................................................................................................7-18 Table 7-17 LEDs on the WBBP and their status................................................................................................7-18 Table 7-18 LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links.....................................................................................7-19 Table 7-19 Ports on the panels of the WBBPa and WBBPb..............................................................................7-19 Table 7-20 Ports on the WBBPd........................................................................................................................7-20 Table 7-21 Specifications of the LBBP..............................................................................................................7-20 Table 7-22 LEDs on the LBBP...........................................................................................................................7-21 Table 7-23 LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links.....................................................................................7-22 Table 7-24 Ports on the LBBP............................................................................................................................7-22 Table 7-25 LED on the FAN unit and its status.................................................................................................7-23 Table 7-26 LED on the UPEU and its status......................................................................................................7-25 Table 7-27 Ports on the panel of the UPEU.......................................................................................................7-25 Table 7-28 Ports on the panel of the UEIU........................................................................................................7-27 Table 7-29 Specifications of the UTRP..............................................................................................................7-27 Table 7-30 LEDs on the panel of the UTRP......................................................................................................7-29 Table 7-31 LEDs on the Ethernet ports of the UTRP2 and UTRP9...................................................................7-30 Table 7-32 Ports of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports............................................................................7-30 Table 7-33 Ports on the panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4 an UTRPb4 supporting eight E1s/T1s..........................7-30 Table 7-34 Port of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1......................................................................................7-30 Table 7-35 Ports of the UTRP9 supporting four electrical ports........................................................................7-31 Table 7-36 DIP switch SW1 on the UTRP.........................................................................................................7-32 Table 7-37 DIP switch SW2 on the UTRP.........................................................................................................7-32 Table 7-38 DIP switch SW3 on the UTRP.........................................................................................................7-32 Table 7-39 LEDs on the USCU..........................................................................................................................7-34 Table 7-40 LEDs on the TOD port.....................................................................................................................7-35 Table 7-41 Ports on the USCU...........................................................................................................................7-35 Table 7-42 LEDs on the panel of the UBRI.......................................................................................................7-36 Table 7-43 CPRI link status LED.......................................................................................................................7-36 Table 7-44 Ports on the panel of the UBRI........................................................................................................7-37 Table 8-1 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30+1 TMC+1 BBC..........8-2 Table 8-2 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 BBC.............................................................................................................................................................8-3 Table 8-3 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 IBBS200T....................................................................................................................................................8-4 Table 8-4 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+1 IBBS200D....................................................................................................................................................8-5 Table 8-5 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+1 IBBS200T....................................................................................................................................................8-6 Table 8-6 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+2 IBBS200D....................................................................................................................................................8-7 Table 8-7 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+2 IBBS200T....................................................................................................................................................8-9 Table 8-8 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMCs...............................................8-9 Table 8-9 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. A).......................8-10

xx

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Tables

Table 8-10 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. B)..................... 8-11 Table 8-11 E1/T1 cable connections..................................................................................................................8-14 Table 8-12 E1/T1 cable connections..................................................................................................................8-15 Table 8-13 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections...................................................................................................8-15 Table 8-14 FE/GE optical cable connections.....................................................................................................8-16 Table 8-15 E1/T1 cable connections..................................................................................................................8-16 Table 8-16 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections...................................................................................................8-17 Table 8-17 FE/GE optical cable connections.....................................................................................................8-17 Table 8-18 E1/T1 cable connections (1).............................................................................................................8-18 Table 8-19 E1/T1 cable connections (2).............................................................................................................8-18 Table 8-20 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1).............................................................................................8-19 Table 8-21 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2).............................................................................................8-19 Table 8-22 FE/GE optical cable connections (1)................................................................................................8-20 Table 8-23 FE/GE optical cable connections (2)................................................................................................8-20 Table 8-24 E1/T1 cable connections (1).............................................................................................................8-21 Table 8-25 E1/T1 cable connections (2).............................................................................................................8-21 Table 8-26 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1).............................................................................................8-21 Table 8-27 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2).............................................................................................8-22 Table 8-28 FE/GE optical cable connections (1)................................................................................................8-22 Table 8-29 FE/GE optical cable connections (2)................................................................................................8-23 Table 8-30 E1/T1 cable connections..................................................................................................................8-23 Table 8-31 FE/GE optical cable connections.....................................................................................................8-24 Table 8-32 E1/T1 cable connections..................................................................................................................8-24 Table 8-33 FE/GE optical cable connections.....................................................................................................8-25 Table 8-34 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTS base station (1) .............................................................................................................................................................................8-25 Table 8-35 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTS base station (2) .............................................................................................................................................................................8-26 Table 8-36 E1/T1 cable connections in IP co-transmission mode..................................................................... 8-26 Table 8-37 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections in IP co-transmission mode......................................................8-27 Table 8-38 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (1)...................................................8-28 Table 8-39 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (2)...................................................8-28 Table 8-40 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTS base station (1) .............................................................................................................................................................................8-29 Table 8-41 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTS base station (2) .............................................................................................................................................................................8-29 Table 8-42 E1/T1 cable connections in IP co-transmission mode..................................................................... 8-30 Table 8-43 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections in IP co-transmission mode......................................................8-30 Table 8-44 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (1)...................................................8-31 Table 8-45 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (2)...................................................8-31 Table 8-46 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM E1/T1+UMTS E1/T1 mode.................8-32 Table 8-47 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GE mode (1).........8-32 Table 8-48 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GE mode (2).........8-33 Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxi

Tables

BBU3900 Hardware Description Table 8-49 E1/T1 cable connections in separate transmission mode.................................................................8-33 Table 8-50 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (1)..........................................................8-34 Table 8-51 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (2)..........................................................8-34 Table 8-52 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-35 Table 8-53 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-36 Table 8-54 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-37 Table 8-55 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-38 Table 8-56 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT for data transmission.........................................................................................................................................................8-39 Table 8-57 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPT for data transmission .............................................................................................................................................................................8-39 Table 8-58 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (1)........................................................................................................................................................................8-40 Table 8-59 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (2)........................................................................................................................................................................8-40 Table 8-60 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT for data transmission.........................................................................................................................................................8-41 Table 8-61 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPT for data transmission .............................................................................................................................................................................8-42 Table 8-62 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (1)........................................................................................................................................................................8-42 Table 8-63 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (2)........................................................................................................................................................................8-43 Table 8-64 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)............8-43 Table 8-65 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)............8-44 Table 8-66 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)............8-45 Table 8-67 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)............8-45 Table 8-68 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1).............8-46 Table 8-69 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2).............8-46 Table 8-70 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)............8-47 Table 8-71 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)............8-48 Table 8-72 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)............8-48 Table 8-73 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)............8-49 Table 8-74 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1).............8-49 Table 8-75 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2).............8-50 Table 8-76 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-51 Table 8-77 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-51 Table 8-78 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-53

xxii

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Tables

Table 8-79 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-53 Table 8-80 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT for data transmission.........................................................................................................................................................8-54 Table 8-81 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPT for data transmission .............................................................................................................................................................................8-54 Table 8-82 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (1)........................................................................................................................................................................8-55 Table 8-83 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (2)........................................................................................................................................................................8-56 Table 8-84 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT for data transmission.........................................................................................................................................................8-56 Table 8-85 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPT for data transmission .............................................................................................................................................................................8-57 Table 8-86 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (1)........................................................................................................................................................................8-57 Table 8-87 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (2)........................................................................................................................................................................8-58 Table 8-88 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)..........8-59 Table 8-89 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)..........8-59 Table 8-90 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)..........8-60 Table 8-91 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)..........8-60 Table 8-92 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1)..........8-61 Table 8-93 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2)..........8-62 Table 8-94 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)..........8-62 Table 8-95 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)..........8-63 Table 8-96 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)..........8-63 Table 8-97 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)..........8-64 Table 8-98 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1)..........8-64 Table 8-99 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2)..........8-65 Table 8-100 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-66 Table 8-101 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-67 Table 8-102 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-68 Table 8-103 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-68 Table 8-104 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE electrical port).....................................................................................................................................................................8-69 Table 8-105 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE optical port).....................................................................................................................................................................8-70 Table 8-106 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE electrical port).....................................................................................................................................................................8-71 Table 8-107 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE optical port).....................................................................................................................................................................8-71

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxiii

Tables

BBU3900 Hardware Description Table 8-108 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30+1 TMC+1 BBC.....................................................................................................................................................................8-82 Table 8-109 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 BBC..................................................................................................................................8-83 Table 8-110 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 IBBS200T........................................................................................................................8-84 Table 8-111 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T......................................................................................................8-85 Table 8-112 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 2 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+2 BBC..................................................................................................................................8-86 Table 8-113 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 2 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+2 IBBS200T........................................................................................................................8-87 Table 8-114 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+2 IBBS200D/IBBS200T......................................................................................................8-88 Table 8-115 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 2 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+4 IBBS200D/IBBS200T......................................................................................................8-89 Table 8-116 Monitoring cable connections of a base station configured with one OMB in the AC power supply scenario................................................................................................................................................................8-90 Table 8-117 Monitoring cable connections of a base station configured with two TMCs.................................8-90 Table 8-118 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. A) .............................................................................................................................................................................8-91 Table 8-119 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. B) .............................................................................................................................................................................8-92 Table 8-120 Monitoring cable connections of a base station configured with one OMB in the DC power supply scenario................................................................................................................................................................8-92 Table 9-1 List of BBU3900 Cables......................................................................................................................9-3 Table 9-2 Pin assignment for the wires of the -48 V power cable.......................................................................9-7 Table 9-3 Pin assignment for the wires of the +24 V power cable......................................................................9-7 Table 9-4 Connectors of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable.........................................................................................9-9 Table 9-5 Pin assignment for the wires of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable.............................................................9-9 Table 9-6 Pin assignment for the wires of the 120-ohm E1 twisted pair cable..................................................9-10 Table 9-7 Pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable........................................9-11 Table 9-8 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE cable..............................................................................9-13 Table 9-9 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable......................................9-14 Table 9-10 Labels and recommended connections for the branch cables of the multi-mode optical cable between the BBU and RRU...............................................................................................................................................9-17 Table 9-11 Labels and recommended connections for the branch cables of the multi-mode optical cable between RRUs...................................................................................................................................................................9-17 Table 9-12 Labels and recommended connections for the branch cables of the single-mode optical cable and recommended connections..................................................................................................................................9-17 Table 9-13 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU .............................................................................................................................................................................9-18 Table 9-14 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the HEUA and the BBU .............................................................................................................................................................................9-19 Table 9-15 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU .............................................................................................................................................................................9-20 Table 9-16 Pin assignment for the wires of the EMUA monitoring signal cable..............................................9-21

xxiv

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Tables

Table 9-17 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC).......................9-22 Table 9-18 Pin assignment for the wires of the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)........................9-23 Table 9-19 Pin assignment for the wires of the BBU alarm cable.....................................................................9-24 Table 10-1 Specifications of the OMB...............................................................................................................10-5 Table 10-2 Specifications of the IMB03............................................................................................................10-8 Table 10-3 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03..........................................................................10-9 Table 10-4 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-03...............................................................................................10-11 Table 10-5 Panel of the AC/DC power equipment...........................................................................................10-12 Table 10-6 LEDs on the panel of the rectifier..................................................................................................10-12 Table 10-7 LEDs on the panel of the monitoring module................................................................................10-13 Table 10-8 Settings of the DIP switches on the PMU......................................................................................10-14 Table 10-9 Ports of the UELP..........................................................................................................................10-16 Table 10-10 DIP switch on the UELP..............................................................................................................10-17 Table 10-11 Ports on the panel of the UFLP....................................................................................................10-17 Table 10-12 Ports on the panel of the USLP2..................................................................................................10-18 Table 10-13 Mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2..................10-19

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxv

BBU3900 Hardware Description

1 Changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description

Changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description


This provides the changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description.

03 (2010-10-25)
This is the second commercial release. Compared with issue 02 (2010-08-30), no information is added. Compared with issue 02 (2010-08-30), the following part is modified: Part 7.1 Exterior of the BBU3900 Modification The monitoring principle of the OMB is modified.

Compared with issue 02 (2010-08-30), no information is deleted.

02 (2010-08-30)
This is the first commercial release. Compared with issue 01 (2010-05-04), this issue is added with the following topic: l l l l l l l l l l 6.1 BBU Monitoring Port 6.2 Monitoring Principles of the Cabinets 6.3 Customized Alarm Input 5.5 Principles for Configuring the CPRI Ports in the LO Base Station 5.6 Principles for Configuring the CPRI Ports in the GL Base Station 5.7 Principles for Configuring the CPRI Ports in the UL Base Station 8.2 Transmission Cable Connections 8.3.4 CPRI Cable Connection in the LO Base Station 8.3.5 CPRI Cable Connections in the GL Base Station 8.3.6 CPRI Cable Connections in the a UL Base Station

Compared with issue 01 (2010-05-04), the following part is modified:


Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1-1

1 Changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Part 7.1 Exterior of the BBU3900 10.6.4 USLP2

Modification The position of the ESN is added. The mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2 is added.

Compared with issue 01 (2010-05-04), this issue deletes the following topics: l l l External monitoring port Monitoring scheme Monitoring board configurations

01 (2010-05-04)
This is the draft version.

1-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

2
About This Chapter

Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

The DBS3900 consists of the BBU3900 and different types of RRUs. The RRUs can be installed remotely so that the DBS3900 can be used in various scenarios outdoors. To meet the complicated and various environments outdoors, Huawei provides multiple cabinets with different functions for the distributed base station. The cabinets are the APM series cabinets (such as APM30, APM30H (Ver. A), and APM30H (Ver. B)), TMC series cabinets (such as TMC, TMC11H (Ver.A), and TMC11H (Ver. B)), and battery cabinets (such as the BBC, IBBS200D, and IBBS200T). Figure 2-1 shows the exteriors of the cabinets.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-1

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 2-1 Exteriors of the cabinets

The APM series cabinets are the power cabinets used for Huawei radio communication products outdoors. The APM series cabinets provide AC and DC power distribution functions for distributed base stations and separate base stations used outdoors and also provide space for customer equipment. The APM30 is different from the APM30H (Ver. A) in heat dissipation and monitoring modes. The APM30 uses the breathable film and fans for heat dissipation, and the APM30H (Ver. A) uses the core of the heat exchanger and inner and outer air circulation fans for heat dissipation. The APM30 is configured with the APMI and AFMU for environment and power monitoring, and the APM30H (Ver. A) is configured with the HEUA for fan monitoring and alarm reporting. The APM30H (Ver. A) is different from the APM30H (Ver. B) in monitoring and power distribution modes. The APM30H (Ver. A) is configured with the HEUA for fan monitoring and alarm reporting, and the APM30H (Ver. B) is configured with the CMUA as the central
2-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

monitoring unit. The APM30H (Ver. A) is configured with the PDU as the power distribution unit, and the APM30H (Ver. B) is configured with the EPS subrack as the power distribution unit. In addition, the APM30H (Ver.B) is configured with the Electronic Labeling Unit (ELU) for automatic cabinet type reporting. The TMC series cabinets are the transmission cabinets used for Huawei radio communication products outdoors. The TMC series cabinets provide DC power distribution functions for distributed base stations and separate base stations and also provide space for customer equipment. The TMC is different from the TMC11H (Ver. A) in heat dissipation and monitoring modes, and the TMC11H (Ver. A) is different from the TMC11H (Ver.B) in monitoring mode. The TMC uses the breathable film and fans for heat dissipation, and the TMC11H (Ver. A) uses the core of the heat exchanger and inner and outer air circulation fans for heat dissipation. The TMC is configured with the APMI and AFMU as the monitoring unit, the TMC11H (Ver.A) is configured with the HEUA as the monitoring unit, and the TMC11H (Ver. B) is configured with the CMUA and HPMI as the monitoring unit. In addition, the TMC11H (Ver. B) is configured with the ELU for automatic cabinet type reporting. The BBC, IBBS200D, and IBBS200T are the battery cabinets used for Huawei radio communication products outdoors. The cabinets provide space for batteries, which provide longduration backup power for the distributed base station and separate base station. The IBBS200D is different from the IBBS200T in the configurations of the modules in the cabinets. For details, see 2.1 Module Configurations in the DBS3900 Cabinets.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-3

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

BBU3900 Hardware Description

2.1 Module Configurations in the DBS3900 Cabinets


This section describes the module configurations in the DBS3900 cabinets.

APM
NOTE

For details about the functions of the DBS3900 cabinets, see the APM30 User Guide, APM30H User Guide, and APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D/T User Guide.

The APM series cabinets are divided into the APM30, APM30H (Ver. A), and APM30H (Ver. B) based on different versions. Figure 2-2 shows the module configurations in the APM series cabinets. Figure 2-2 Module configurations in the APM series cabinets

The APM series cabinets are different from each other in heat dissipation, power distribution, and monitoring modes. The differences are achieved through the internal components of the cabinets, as listed in Table 2-1.

2-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Table 2-1 Functions of the components in the APM series cabinets Cabinet Type SN Module/ Board Optional/ Mandatory Maximum Number of Boards/ Modules Configure d in a Single Cabinet 1 Descriptio n

APM30

Fan box

Mandatory

The fan box is installed at the top of the cabinet, configured with the fan, APMI, and AFMU. The PDU distributes AC power and DC power. The BBU is installed in the 2 U space under the PDU, processing baseband signals. The PSU converts 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power, which is configured only in the AC cabinet. The PMU is a power monitoring unit, which is configured only in the AC cabinet.

PDU

Mandatory

BBU

Mandatory

PSU (AC/ DC)

Mandatory

PMU

Mandatory

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-5

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Cabinet Type

SN

Module/ Board

Optional/ Mandatory

Maximum Number of Boards/ Modules Configure d in a Single Cabinet 1

Descriptio n

APM30H (Ver. A)

Fan box

Mandatory

The fan box is installed at the top of the cabinet, configured with the fan, HEUA, and HPMI. The PDU distributes AC power and DC power. The BBU is installed in the 2 U space under the PDU, processing baseband signals. The PSU converts 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power, which is configured only in the AC cabinet. The PMU is configured only in the AC cabinet.

PDU

Mandatory

BBU

Mandatory

PSU (AC/ DC)

Mandatory

PMU

Mandatory

2-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Cabinet Type

SN

Module/ Board

Optional/ Mandatory

Maximum Number of Boards/ Modules Configure d in a Single Cabinet 1

Descriptio n

APM30H (Ver. B)

Fan box

Mandatory

The fan box is installed at the top of the cabinet, configured with the fan, HPMI, and CMUA. The SLPU is installed in the top 1 U space of the cabinet, providing protection for trunk signals as a mandatory component. The SLPU is configured with the UELP or UFLP. The SLPU can also provide protection for monitoring signal cables. To enable the function, the SLPU must be installed in the 1 U space under the BBU and configured with two USLP2s.

SLPU

Mandatory

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-7

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Cabinet Type

SN

Module/ Board

Optional/ Mandatory

Maximum Number of Boards/ Modules Configure d in a Single Cabinet 1

Descriptio n

EPS

Mandatory

The EPS distributes AC power and DC power, which is configured only in the APM30H (Ver. B). The BBU is installed in the 2 U space under the EPS, processing baseband signals. The PSU converts 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power, which is configured only in the AC cabinet. The PMU is a power monitoring unit, which is configured only in the AC cabinet.

BBU

Mandatory

PSU (AC/ DC)

Mandatory

PMU

Mandatory

TMC
The TMC series cabinets are divided into the TMC, TMC11H (Ver. A), and TMC11H (Ver. B) based on different versions. The TMC series cabinets can also be divided into the following two types based on different application scenarios:
2-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

TMC providing space for the transmission equipment, as shown in Figure 2-3 Figure 2-3 TMC series cabinets (1)

TMC configured with the BBU in the -48 V DC power supply scenario, as shown in Figure 2-4 Figure 2-4 TMC series cabinets (2)

The TMC series cabinets are different from each other in heat dissipation and monitoring modes. The differences are achieved through the internal components of the cabinets, as listed in Table 2-2.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-9

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Table 2-2 Functions of the components in the TMC series cabinets Cabinet Type SN Module/ Board Optional/ Mandatory Maximum Number of Boards/ Modules Configure d in a Single Cabinet 1 Descriptio n

TMC

Fan box

Mandatory

The fan box is installed at the top of the cabinet, configured with the fan, APMI, and AFMU. l The TMC providing space for the transmiss ion equipme nt is configure d with the DCDU-0 3C. l The TMC configure d with the BBU in the -48 V DC power supply scenario is configure d with the DCDU-0 3B.

DCDU-03

Mandatory

2-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Cabinet Type

SN

Module/ Board

Optional/ Mandatory

Maximum Number of Boards/ Modules Configure d in a Single Cabinet 1

Descriptio n

BBU

Mandatory

The BBU is installed in the 2 U space under the DCDU-03B, processing baseband signals. The fan box is installed at the top of the cabinet, configured with the fan, HEUA, and HPMI.

TMC11H (Ver. A)

Fan box

Mandatory

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-11

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Cabinet Type

SN

Module/ Board

Optional/ Mandatory

Maximum Number of Boards/ Modules Configure d in a Single Cabinet 1

Descriptio n

DCDU-03

Mandatory

l The TMC11H (Ver. A) providing space for the transmiss ion equipme nt is configure d with the DCDU-0 3C. l The TMC11H (Ver. A) configure d with the BBU in the -48 V DC power supply scenario is configure d with the DCDU-0 3B.

BBU

Mandatory

The BBU is installed in the 2 U space under the DCDU-03B, processing baseband signals.

2-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Cabinet Type

SN

Module/ Board

Optional/ Mandatory

Maximum Number of Boards/ Modules Configure d in a Single Cabinet 1

Descriptio n

TMC11H (Ver. B)

Fan box

Mandatory

The fan box is installed at the top of the cabinet, configured with the fan, HPMI, and CMUA. The SLPU is installed in the top 1 U space of the cabinet, providing protection for trunk signals as a mandatory component. The SLPU is configured with the UELP or UFLP. The SLPU can also provide protection for monitoring signal cables. To enable the function, the SLPU must be installed in the 1 U space under the BBU and configured with two USLP2s.

SLPU

Mandatory

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-13

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Cabinet Type

SN

Module/ Board

Optional/ Mandatory

Maximum Number of Boards/ Modules Configure d in a Single Cabinet 1

Descriptio n

DCDU-03

Mandatory

l The TMC11H (Ver. B) providing space for the transmiss ion equipme nt is configure d with the DCDU-0 3C. l The TMC11H (Ver. B) configure d with the BBU390 0 in the -48 V DC power supply scenario is configure d with the DCDU-0 3B.

BBU

Mandatory

The BBU is installed in the 2 U space under the DCDU-03B, processing baseband signals.

2-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

BBC/IBBS
The battery cabinets are divided into the BBC, IBBS200T (Ver. A), IBBS200T (Ver. B), and IBBS200D based on different versions. Figure 2-5 shows the module configurations in the battery cabinets. Figure 2-5 Module configurations in the battery cabinets

The IBBS200D is different from the IBBS200T in heat dissipation mode. The differences are achieved through the monitoring modules installed in different positions in the cabinets, as listed in Table 2-3. Table 2-3 Functions of the components in the battery cabinets Cabinet Type SN Module/ Board Optional/ Mandatory Maximum Number of Boards/ Modules Configure d in a Single Cabinet 1 Descriptio n

BBC

Power supply box for the heating film Ground bar of the cabinet

Mandatory

The power supply box feeds power to the heating film. The ground bar is used for the grounding of the components in the cabinet.

Mandatory

3 4

Battery Power box for the BBC

Mandatory Mandatory

8 4 The power box provides power to the batteries.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-15

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Cabinet Type

SN

Module/ Board

Optional/ Mandatory

Maximum Number of Boards/ Modules Configure d in a Single Cabinet 1

Descriptio n

IBBS200T (Ver.A)

TEC

Mandatory

The TEC is installed in the protecting hood for the TEC on the front door of the cabinet. The TEC consists of the TEC module, inner air circulation fan, outer air circulation fan, heatdissipation piece, and monitoring board. The transfer terminal is installed on the inner side of the front door of the cabinet, consisting of four interconnecti on terminals. The transfer terminal is installed on the inner side of the front door of the cabinet.

Transfer terminal for signal cables

Mandatory

Transfer terminal for the input power cable for the TEC

Mandatory

2-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Cabinet Type

SN

Module/ Board

Optional/ Mandatory

Maximum Number of Boards/ Modules Configure d in a Single Cabinet 1

Descriptio n

Heat insulation foam

Mandatory

The heat insulation foam is installed on the left in the cabinet. The battery provides longduration backup power for a base station. The junction box is installed on the right in the IBBS200T, consisting of the copper bar, circuit breaker for the batteries, and MCB for the TEC.

Battery

Mandatory

Junction box for the power cable

Mandatory

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-17

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Cabinet Type

SN

Module/ Board

Optional/ Mandatory

Maximum Number of Boards/ Modules Configure d in a Single Cabinet 1

Descriptio n

IBBS200T (Ver. B)

TEC

Mandatory

The TEC is installed in the protecting hood for the TEC on the front door of the cabinet. The TEC consists of the TEC module, inner air circulation fan, outer air circulation fan, heatdissipation piece, and monitoring board. The CMUA provides the functions of the temperature control, Boolean alarm detection, and ELU identificatio n of the cabinet.

CMUA

Mandatory

2-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Cabinet Type

SN

Module/ Board

Optional/ Mandatory

Maximum Number of Boards/ Modules Configure d in a Single Cabinet 8

Descriptio n

Power distribution box

Mandatory

The power distribution box is installed on the upper right of the cabinet, transferring and distributing the power to the TEC or fan and to the batteries. The battery provides longduration backup power for a base station. The fan is installed on the front door of the cabinet, dissipating the heat in the cabinet.

Battery

Mandatory

IBBS200D

Fan

Mandatory

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-19

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Cabinet Type

SN

Module/ Board

Optional/ Mandatory

Maximum Number of Boards/ Modules Configure d in a Single Cabinet 1

Descriptio n

CMUA

Mandatory

The CMUA provides the functions of the temperature control, Boolean alarm detection, and ELU identificatio n of the cabinet. The battery provides longduration backup power for a base station. The power distribution box is installed on the upper right of the cabinet, transferring and distributing the power to the TEC or fan and to the batteries.

Battery

Mandatory

Power distribution box

Optional

OMB
The OMB can be configured with different power equipment in different power supply scenarios. Figure 2-6 shows the cabinet configuration.

2-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Figure 2-6 Component configuration of the OMB

Table 2-4 lists the functions of the OMB.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-21

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Table 2-4 Functions of the OMB Cabinet Type SN Module/ Board Optional/ Mandatory Maximum Number of Boards/ Modules Configure d in a Single Cabinet 1 Descriptio n

OMB (220 V/110 V AC)

HEUA

Mandatory

The HEUA monitors the heat exchanger. It provides power to the FAN unit, monitors the status of the FAN unit, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surge protection alarm information, and reports the information to the main control unit. The BBU is installed in the 2 U space on the left of the OMB, processing baseband signals. The outer air circulation fan dissipates the heat in the cabinet.

BBU

Mandatory

Outer air circulation fan

Mandatory

2-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Cabinet Type

SN

Module/ Board

Optional/ Mandatory

Maximum Number of Boards/ Modules Configure d in a Single Cabinet 1

Descriptio n

DCDU-03B

Mandatory

The DCDU-03B provides power for the BBU, RRU, or other transmission devices. The inner air circulation fan dissipates the heat in the cabinet. The HEUA monitors the heat exchanger. It provides power to the FAN unit, monitors the status of the FAN unit, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surge protection alarm information, and reports the information to the main control unit.

Inner air circulation fan

Mandatory

OMB (-48 V DC)

HEUA

Mandatory

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-23

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Cabinet Type

SN

Module/ Board

Optional/ Mandatory

Maximum Number of Boards/ Modules Configure d in a Single Cabinet 1

Descriptio n

BBU

Mandatory

The BBU is installed in the 2 U space on the left of the OMB, processing baseband signals. The outer air circulation fan dissipates the heat in the cabinet. The AC surge protection box provides protection for the AC input power. The AC/DC power device provides power input for the BBU, RRU, or other transmission devices. The inner air circulation fan dissipates the heat in the cabinet.

Outer air circulation fan

Mandatory

AC surge protection box

Mandatory

Power equipment (AC/DC)

Mandatory

Inner air circulation fan

Mandatory

2-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

2.2 Board Configurations of the BBU3900


This section describes the board configurations of the BBU3900 in the GSM Only (hereinafter referred to as GO), UMTS Only (hereinafter referred to as UO), LTE Only (hereinafter referred to as LO), GSM+UMTS (hereinafter referred to as GU), GSM+LTE (hereinafter referred to as GL), and UMTS+LTE (hereinafter referred to as UL) scenarios.

Slots in the BBU3900


The board configurations of the BBU3900 in GO mode, BBU3900 in GU mode, BBU3900 in UO mode, BBU3900 in LO mode, BBU3900 in GL mode, and BBU3900 in UL mode are the same, as shown in Figure 2-7. Figure 2-7 Slots in the BBU3900

BBU3900 in GO Mode
Table 2-5 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in GO mode. Table 2-5 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in GO mode Board GTMU Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory Maximum Quantity 1 Slot Slots 5 and 6 Configuration Restriction Configured only in slot 6 (both slots 5 and 6 are occupied) Configured only in slot 16 Preferentially configured in slot 19 in the case of a single UPEU

FAN UPEU

Mandatory Mandatory

1 2

Slot 16 Slot 18 or slot 19

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-25

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Board USCU

Optional/ Mandatory Optional

Maximum Quantity 1

Slot Slot 0 or slot 1

Configuration Restriction Preferentially configured in slot 1 Configured in slot 1 in the case of 1 U dualsatellite-card (in this case, slot 0 is also occupied)

UEIU

Optional

Slot 18

Figure 2-8 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 in GO mode. Figure 2-8 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in GO mode

BBU3900 in UO Mode
Table 2-6 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in UO mode. Table 2-6 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in UO mode Board WMPT Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory Maximum Quantity 2 Slot Slot 6 or slot 7 Configuration Restriction Preferentially configured in slot 7 in the case of a single WMPT

2-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Board WBBP

Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory

Maximum Quantity 4

Slot Slots 0 to 3

Configuration Restriction Configured in slot 3 by default: l If an expansion of the CPRI port is required, configure the board in slot 2. l If an expansion of the CPRI port is not required, configure the board in a slot, with slot priority of slot 0, slot 1, and slot 2.

FAN UPEU

Mandatory Mandatory

1 2

Slot 16 Slot 18 or slot 19

Configured only in slot 16 Preferentially configured in slot 19 in the case of a single UPEU Configured in a slot, with slot priority of slot 4, slot 5, slot 0, and slot 1 Preferentially configured in slot 1 Configured in slot 1 in the case of 1 U dualsatellite-card (in this case, slot 0 is also occupied)

UEIU UTRP

Optional Optional

1 4

Slot 18 Slot 0, slot 1, slot 4, and slot 5

USCU

Optional

Slot 1 or slot 0

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-27

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 2-9 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 in UO mode. Figure 2-9 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in UO mode

BBU3900 in LO Mode
Table 2-7 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in LO mode. Table 2-7 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in LO mode Board LMPT Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory Maximum Quantity 2 Slot Slot 6 or slot 7 Remarks Configured only in slot 7 in the case of a single LMPT Configured in a slot, with slot priority of slot 3, slot 1, and slot 2 in the case of a single LBBP Configured only in slot 16 Configured only in slot 19 in the case of a single UPEU Preferentially configured in slot 4

LBBP

Mandatory

Slots 0 to 3

FAN UPEU

Mandatory Mandatory

1 2

Slot 16 Slot 18 or slot 19

UEIU UTRP

Optional Optional

1 1

Slot 18 Slot 4 or slot 5

2-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Board USCU

Optional/ Mandatory Optional

Maximum Quantity 1

Slot Slot 0, slot 1, slot 4, or slot 5

Remarks Preferentially configured in slot 5 in the case of a single USCU; configured in slot 5 in the case of 1 U USCU (in this case, slot 4 is also occupied) Preferentially configured in slot 1 if slot 4 and slot 5 are occupied; configured in slot 1 in the case of 1 U USCU (in this case, slot 0 is also occupied)

Figure 2-10 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 in LO mode. Figure 2-10 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in LO mode

BBU3900 in GU Mode
Table 2-8 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in GU mode. Table 2-8 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in GU mode Board WMPT Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory Maximum Quantity 1 Slot Slot 7 Configuration Restriction Configured only in slot 7
2-29

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Board GTMU

Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory

Maximum Quantity 1

Slot Slots 5 and 6

Configuration Restriction Configured only in slot 6 (both slots 5 and 6 are occupied) Configured in a slot, with slot priority of slot 3, slot 0, slot 1, and slot 2 Configured only in slot 16 Configured only in slot 19 in the case of a single UPEU Configured in a slot, with slot priority of slot 4, slot 0, and slot 1 Preferentially configured in slot 1 Configured in slot 1 in the case of 1 U dualsatellite-card (in this case, slot 0 is also occupied)

WBBP

Mandatory

Slots 0 to 3

FAN UPEU

Mandatory Mandatory

1 2

Slot 16 Slot 18 or slot 19

UEIU UTRP

Optional Optional

1 2

Slot 18 Slot 0, slot 1, or slot 4

USCU

Optional

Slot 0 or slot 1

UBRI

Optional

Slot 2

Figure 2-11 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 in GU mode. Figure 2-11 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in GU mode

2-30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

BBU3900 in GL Mode
Table 2-9 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in GL mode. Table 2-9 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in GL mode Board LMPT GTMU Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory Mandatory Maximum Quantity 1 1 Slot Slot 7 Slots 5 and 6 Remarks Configured only in slot 7 Configured only in slot 6 (both slots 5 and 6 are occupied) Configured in a slot, with slot priority of slot 3, slot 1, and slot 2 Configured only in slot 16 Configured only in slot 19 in the case of a single UPEU Configured in a slot, with slot priority of slot 4, slot 0, and slot 1 The slot priority of the GO UTRP is higher than that of the LO UTRP USCU Optional 1 Slot 0 or slot 1 Preferentially configured in slot 1 Configured in slot 1 in the case of 1 U dualsatellite-card (in this case, slot 0 is also occupied) UBRI
Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

LBBP

Mandatory

Slots 0 to 3

FAN UPEU

Mandatory Mandatory

1 2

Slot 16 Slot 18 or slot 19

UEIU UTRP

Optional Optional

1 2

Slot 18 Slot 0, slot 1, or slot 4

Optional

Slot 2

2-31

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 2-12 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 in GL mode. Figure 2-12 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in GL mode

BBU3900 in UL Mode
Table 2-10 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in UL mode. Table 2-10 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in UL mode Board LMPT WMPT LBBP Optional/ Mandatory Mandatory Mandatory Mandatory Maximum Quantity 1 1 2 Slot Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 1 and slot 2 Remarks Configured only in slot 6 Configured only in slot 7 Configured only in slot 2 in the case of a single LBBP Configured in a slot, with slot priority of slot 3, slot 0, and slot 1 in the case of a single WBBP Configured only in slot 16 Configured only in slot 19 in the case of a single UPEU Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

WBBP

Mandatory

Slot 0, slot 1, or slot 3

FAN UPEU

Mandatory Mandatory

1 2

Slot 16 Slot 18 or slot 19

UEIU
2-32

Optional

Slot 18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BBU3900 Hardware Description

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Board UTRP

Optional/ Mandatory Optional

Maximum Quantity 2

Slot Slot 0, slot 1, slot 4, or slot 5

Remarks Configured in a slot, with slot priority of slot 4, slot 5, slot 0, and slot 1 The slot priority of the UO UTRP is higher than that of the LO UTRP

USCU

Optional

Slot 0 or slot 1

Preferentially configured in slot 1 Configured in slot 1 in the case of 1 U dualsatellite-card (in this case, slot 0 is also occupied)

Figure 2-13 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 in UL mode. Figure 2-13 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in UL mode

2.3 Configuration of the SLPU


This section describes the configuration principles of the SPLU.

Slots of the SLPU


Figure 2-14 shows the slots of the SLPU.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-33

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 2-14 Slots of the SLPU

Configuration of the SLPU


When serving as a trunk signal protection unit, the SLPU is a mandatory component, and it is integrated with a UELP or UFLP and installed in the 1 U space in the upper part of the cabinet. Table 2-11 lists the configuration principles of the SLPU. Table 2-11 Configuration principles of the SLPU (1) Board UELP Optional/ Mandatory Optional Maximum Quantity 4 Slot Slots 0 to 3 Configuration Restriction The priorities of the slots in configuration are as follows in descending order: slot 2, slot 0, slot 1, and slot 3. If both the UELP and UFLP are configured, the UFLP is installed in a slot with a higher priority than the UELP.

UFLP

Optional

Slot 3

When serving as a monitoring signal protection unit for not more than 16 dry contacts, the SLPU is an optional component, and it is integrated with two USLP2s and installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of the BBU. Table 2-12 lists the configuration principles of the SLPU. Table 2-12 Configuration principles of the SLPU (2) Board USLP2 Optional/ Mandatory Optional Quantity 2 Slot Slots 2 and 3 Configuration Restriction -

2-34

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

3 Configurations of the Matched Cabinets

Configurations of the Matched Cabinets


When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors, multiple matched cabinets must be configured to meet the backup power, transmission, and capacity requirements. Different types of cabinet can be combined to form the DBS3900, providing multiple outdoor solutions.

Cabinet Configuration Principles


NOTE

In the following description, the APM is the APM30, APM30H (Ver. A), and APM30H (Ver. B). The TMC falls into the categories of the TMC, TMC11H (Ver. A), and TMC11H (Ver. B).

l l l l l l l l

A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs. If there are more than 12 RRUs, they must be configured in different base stations. A single APM or TMC can provide power to a maximum of six RRUs. A single APM30/APM30H (Ver. A) can be configured with only a single TMC/TMC11H (Ver. A) and a maximum of one IBBS200T. A single APM30H (Ver. B) can be configured with only a single TMC11H (Ver. B) and a maximum of two IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts. A maximum of six power cables and twelve 2-core optical cables can be led out from a single APM. A single DCDU supplies power to a maximum of six RRUs. The APM or TMC can be installed on the floor or stacked on the battery cabinet. The BBC/IBBS200D/IBBS200T can be stacked on each other or placed under a TMC. When the BBC/IBBS200D/IBBS200T is stacked with the TMC, the BBC/IBBS200D/ IBBS200T is stacked on the TMC. If auxiliary cabinets such as the battery cabinet or TMC are required during an initial site construction, the auxiliary cabinet is positioned on the left, and the primary cabinet is positioned on the right. If both the battery cabinet and the TMC are required, the battery cabinet is positioned on the left of the primary cabinet, and the TMC is stacked on the battery cabinet or positioned on the left of the battery cabinet. Space must be reserved during an initial site construction for future capacity expansion. In the capacity expansion scenario, the original cabinets are not relocated while new cabinets are added only from left to right. In a special scenario, new cabinets can be added from right to left.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-1

3 Configurations of the Matched Cabinets

BBU3900 Hardware Description

110 V AC/220 V AC Power Supply Scenario


When backup power is not required, one to six RRUs are required, and the space required for customer equipment is not more than 5 U, one APM is configured in a base station. When the space required for customer equipment ranges from 5 U to 16 U, one APM and one TMC are configured. When backup power is not required, 7 to 12 RRUs are required, and the space required for customer equipment is not more than 12 U, one primary APM and one extension APM are configured in a base station. When the space required for customer equipment ranges from 12 U to 23 U, one primary APM, one extension APM, and one TMC are configured. Figure 3-1 shows the configurations of the cabinets when backup power is not required. Figure 3-1 Configurations of the cabinets when backup power is not required

When 184 Ah/48 V backup power and one to six RRUs are required, and the space required for customer equipment is not more than 5 U, one APM and one IBBS are configured. When the space required for customer equipment ranges from 5 U to 16 U, one APM, one TMC, and one IBBS are configured. When 184 Ah/48 V backup power and 7 to 12 RRUs are required, and the space required for customer equipment is not more than 12 U, one primary APM30H (Ver.B), one extension APM30H (Ver.B), and two IBBSs are configured in a base station. When the space required for customer equipment ranges from 12 U to 23 U, one primary APM30H (Ver.B), one extension APM30H (Ver.B), two IBBSs, and one TMC are configured. Figure 3-2 shows the configurations of the cabinets when 184 Ah/48 V backup power is required.

3-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

3 Configurations of the Matched Cabinets

Figure 3-2 Configurations of the cabinets when 184 Ah/48 V backup power is required

When 368 Ah/48 V backup power and one to six RRUs are required, and the space required for customer equipment is not more than 5 U, one APM30H (Ver. B) and two IBBSs are configured. When the space required for customer equipment ranges from 5 U to 16 U, one APM30H (Ver. B), one TMC, and two IBBSs are configured. When 368 Ah/48 V backup power and 7 to 12 RRUs are required, and the space required for customer equipment is not more than 12 U, one primary APM30H (Ver.B), one extension APM30H (Ver.B), and four IBBSs are configured in a base station. When the space required for customer equipment ranges from 5 U to 23 U, one primary APM30H (Ver.B), one extension APM30H (Ver.B), four IBBSs, and one TMC are configured. Figure 3-3 shows the configurations of the cabinets when 368 Ah/48 V backup power is required.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-3

3 Configurations of the Matched Cabinets

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 3-3 Configurations of the cabinets when 368 Ah/48 V backup power is required

When backup power is not required, one to two RRUs are required, one OMB with a built-in AC/DC power equipment is configured, as shown in Figure 3-4. Figure 3-4 Configurations of the OMB

3-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

3 Configurations of the Matched Cabinets

48 V DC Power Supply Scenario


When one to six RRUs are configured in a base station, and the space required for customer equipment is not more than 9 U, one TMC is configured. Figure 3-5 shows the cabinet configuration. Figure 3-5 1 TMC

When one to six RRUs are configured in a base station, and the space required for customer equipment ranges from 9 U to 20 U, one primary TMC and one extension TMC are configured. Figure 3-6 shows the cabinet configuration. Figure 3-6 1 primary TMC+1 extension TMC

When 7 to 12 RRUs are configured in a base station, and the space required for customer equipment is not more than 8 U, one TMC with two built-in DCDUs is configured. Figure 3-7 shows the cabinet configuration. Figure 3-7 1 TMC with two built-in DCDUs

When 7 to 12 RRUs are configured in a base station, and the space required for customer equipment ranges from 8 U to 19 U, one primary TMC and one extension TMC are configured. The two TMCs are configured with two DCDUs. Figure 3-8 shows the cabinet configuration.
Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-5

3 Configurations of the Matched Cabinets

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 3-8 1 primary TMC+1 extension TMC with two built-in DCDUs

When one to three RRUs are required, one OMB with a built-in DCDU is configured, as shown in Figure 3-9. Figure 3-9 Configurations of the OMB

3-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

4 Transmission Board Configurations

Transmission Board Configurations

In different modes, different transmission boards can be configured for E1/T1 or FE signal transmission. Table 4-1 lists the transmission modes supported by the boards working in different modes. Table 4-1 Transmission modes supported by the boards Transmission Mode ATM over E1/ T1 IP over E1/T1 Board WMPT UTRP3 GTMU/ GTMUb WMPT UTRP4 UTRPb4 TDM over E1/ T1 GTMU/ GTMUb UTRPb4 Transmission over FE/GE optical cable GTMU/ GTMUb LMPT GSM/UMTS Mode UMTS UMTS GSM UMTS UMTS LTE GSM GSM GSM LTE Port 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 Port Capacity Four channels Eight channels Four channels Four channels Eight channels Eight channels Four channels Four channels 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, and 1000 Mbit/s 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, and 1000 Mbit/s
4-1

WMPT UTRP2

UMTS UMTS

1 2

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4 Transmission Board Configurations

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Transmission Mode Transmission over FE/GE electrical cable

Board GTMU/ GTMUb LMPT

GSM/UMTS Mode GSM LTE

Port 1 2

Port Capacity 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, and 1000 Mbit/s 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, and 1000 Mbit/s

WMPT UTRP9

UMTS UMTS

1 4

NOTE

l The GTMU/GTMUb is mandatory for the GSM mode. When the channels of the E1/T1 signals are more than four, the UTRPb4 must be configured for E1/T1 signal transmission. l The WMPT is mandatory for the UMTS mode. When the channels of the E1/T1 signals are more than four, the UTRP3 or UTRP4 must be configured for E1/T1 signal transmission. When the transmission rate for the FE optical cable is higher than 100 Mbit/s, the UTRP2 must be configured. When the transmission rate for the FE electrical cable is more than 100 Mbit/s, the UTRP9 must be configured. l The transmission over FE/GE optical cable is recommended for the LMPT.

4-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

5 CPRI Port Configurations

5
About This Chapter

CPRI Port Configurations

The CPRI port configurations involves the specifications and configuration principles of the CPRI ports on the BBU and RRU. 5.1 CPRI Port Specifications The CPRI port specifications involves the CPRI ports on the BBU and RRU. 5.2 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports in the UMTS Only Base Station When a base station works in UMTS mode, the RRU is connected to the WBBP in the BBU through the CPRI ports. 5.3 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports in the GSM Only Base Station When a base station works in GSM mode, the RRU is connected to the GTMU/GTMUb in the BBU through the CPRI ports. 5.4 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports in the GSM+UMTS Base Station When a base station works in GSM+UMTS mode, the RRU is connected to the GTMU/WBBP in the BBU through the CPRI ports. 5.5 Principles for Configuring the CPRI Ports in the LO Base Station When a base station works in LO mode, the RRU is connected to the LBBP in the BBU through the CPRI ports. 5.6 Principles for Configuring the CPRI Ports in the GL Base Station When a base station works in GL mode, the RRU is connected to the GTMU/LBBP in the BBU through the CPRI ports. 5.7 Principles for Configuring the CPRI Ports in the UL Base Station When a base station works in UL mode, the RRU is connected to the WBBP or LBBP in the BBU through the CPRI ports.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-1

5 CPRI Port Configurations

BBU3900 Hardware Description

5.1 CPRI Port Specifications


The CPRI port specifications involves the CPRI ports on the BBU and RRU.

Specifications of the CPRI ports on the BBU


Table 5-1 lists the specifications of the CPRI ports on the BBU. Table 5-1 Specifications of the CPRI ports on the BBU Board Number of CPRI Ports 6 6 6 3 3 6 6 6 Transmission Rate of the CPRI Port 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s Topology

GTMU GTMUb UBRI WBBPa WBBPb WBBPd LBBPb LBBPc

Star, chain, or ring Star, chain, or ring Star, chain, or ring Star, chain, or ring Star, chain, or ring Star, chain, or ring Star or chain Star or chain

Specifications of the CPRI ports on the RRU


Table 5-2 lists the specifications of the CPRI ports on the RRU. Table 5-2 Specifications of the CPRI ports on the RRU Module Number of CPRI Ports 2 2 2 Transmission Rate of the CPRI Port 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s Topology

RRU3004 RRU3008 RRU3801C


5-2

Star, chain, or ring Star, chain, or ring Star, chain, or ring


Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BBU3900 Hardware Description

5 CPRI Port Configurations

Module

Number of CPRI Ports 2 2 2 2 2 2

Transmission Rate of the CPRI Port 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s

Topology

RRU3804/ RRU3801E RRU3808 RRU3908 V1 RRU3908 V2 RRU3201 RRU3202

Star, chain, or ring Star, chain, or ring Star, chain, or ring Star, chain, or ring Star or chain Star or chain

5.2 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports in the UMTS Only Base Station
When a base station works in UMTS mode, the RRU is connected to the WBBP in the BBU through the CPRI ports.
NOTE

The RRUs in a base station working in UMTS only mode are divided into the RRU3804, RRU3801E, RRU3801C, RRU3805, and RRU3808. The following description is based on the RRU3804.

Basic CPRI Port Connection Principles


l l The RRU supports star and chain topologies. The RRU with the data transmission rate of 1.25 Gbit/s over the CPRI ports supports a maximum of four levels of cascading, and the RRU with the data transmission rate of 2.5 Gbit/s over the CPRI ports supports a maximum of eight levels of cascading. The RRUs working in UMTS mode can be cascaded over the CPRI ports. The CPRI_W port on the RRU is connected to the WBBP, and the CPRI_E port is connected to the lower-level RRU. The CPRI ports on the WBBP are connected to the RRUs from CPRI0 in sequence, and none of the ports is skipped.

l l l

Figure 5-1 shows the basic CPRI port connection principles of the RRU in a base station working in UMTS mode.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-3

5 CPRI Port Configurations

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 5-1 Basic CPRI port connection principles

5.3 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports in the GSM Only Base Station
When a base station works in GSM mode, the RRU is connected to the GTMU/GTMUb in the BBU through the CPRI ports.
NOTE

The RRUs in a base station working in GSM mode are divided into the RRU3008 and RRU3004.

Basic CPRI Port Connection Principles


l l l l The RRU supports star and chain topologies. When cells are not shared, the RRU supports a maximum of six levels of cascading. When cells are shared, the RRU supports a maximum of three levels of cascading. The CPRI_W port on the RRU is connected to the GTMU/GTMUb, and the CPRI_E port is connected to the lower-level RRU. The RRUs working in GSM mode can be cascaded over the CPRI ports.

Figure 5-2 shows the basic CPRI port connection principles of the RRU in a base station working in GSM mode. Figure 5-2 Basic CPRI port connection principles

5-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

5 CPRI Port Configurations

5.4 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports in the GSM +UMTS Base Station
When a base station works in GSM+UMTS mode, the RRU is connected to the GTMU/WBBP in the BBU through the CPRI ports.
NOTE

The RRUs in a base station working in GSM+UMTS mode are divided into the RRU3908 V1 and RRU3908 V2.

Basic CPRI Port Connection Principles


l l l The RRU supports the dual-star topology over the CPRI ports by default. The CPRI_W port on the RRU is connected to the GTMU, and the CPRI_E port is connected to the WBBP. If the CPRI ports on the GTMU are insufficient, the dual-star topology is achieved through the UBRI and WBBP.

Figure 5-3 shows the basic CPRI port connection principles of the RRU in a base station working in GSM+UMTS mode. Figure 5-3 Basic CPRI port connection principles

5.5 Principles for Configuring the CPRI Ports in the LO Base Station
When a base station works in LO mode, the RRU is connected to the LBBP in the BBU through the CPRI ports.
NOTE

The RRUs in a base station working in LO mode are divided into the RRU3201 and RRU3202. The following description is based on the RRU3201.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-5

5 CPRI Port Configurations

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Basic Principles for Configuring the CPRI Port Connection


l l l The RRU supports the star topology. The RRU supports a maximum of four levels of cascading. The CPRI_W port on the RRU is connected to the LBBP, and the CPRI_E port is connected to the lower-level RRU.

Figure 5-4 shows the basic principles for configuring the CPRI port connection of the RRU in a base station working in LO mode. Figure 5-4 Basic principles for configuring the CPRI port connection

5.6 Principles for Configuring the CPRI Ports in the GL Base Station
When a base station works in GL mode, the RRU is connected to the GTMU/LBBP in the BBU through the CPRI ports.
NOTE

The RRUs in a base station working in GL mode are divided into the RRU3908 V1 and RRU3908 V2.

Basic Principles for Configuring the CPRI Port Connection


l l The RRU supports the dual-star topology over the CPRI ports by default. The CPRI_W port on the RRU is connected to the GTMU, and the CPRI_E port is connected to the LBBP.

Figure 5-5 shows the basic principles for configuring the CPRI port connection of the RRU in a base station working in GL mode.

5-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

5 CPRI Port Configurations

Figure 5-5 Basic principles for configuring the CPRI port connection

5.7 Principles for Configuring the CPRI Ports in the UL Base Station
When a base station works in UL mode, the RRU is connected to the WBBP or LBBP in the BBU through the CPRI ports.
NOTE

The RRUs in a base station working in UL mode can be classified into the RRU3908 V1 and RRU3908 V2.

Basic Principles for Configuring the CPRI Port Connection


l l l The RRU supports the dual-star topology over the CPRI ports by default. When the RRU works in dual-star topology, the signals in the same mode cannot be transmitted over two CPRI links. The CPRI_W port on the RRU is connected to the WBBP, and the CPRI_E port is connected to the LBBP.

Figure 5-6 shows the basic principles for configuring the CPRI port connection of the RRU in a base station working in UL mode. Figure 5-6 Basic principles for configuring the CPRI port connection

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-7

BBU3900 Hardware Description

6 DBS3900 Monitoring System

6
About This Chapter

DBS3900 Monitoring System

The DBS3900 monitoring system enables monitoring of all boards and components in the cabinet. If any board or component is faulty, an alarm is automatically reported. The UPEU and UEIU in the BBU or the RRU collects monitoring signals from boards and components to achieve environment monitoring of the DBS3900. 6.1 BBU Monitoring Port 6.2 Monitoring Principles of the Cabinets The DBS3900 cabinet is monitored by various boards. The boards collect alarms from sensors and fans, and then transmit the alarm signals to the MON port on the BBU through the RS485 serial bus. In this manner, the boards monitor the cabinet. 6.3 Customized Alarm Input

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-1

6 DBS3900 Monitoring System

BBU3900 Hardware Description

6.1 BBU Monitoring Port


The BBU houses the UPEU and UEIU for monitoring. Each board has two Boolean input ports and two RS485 input ports, and each Boolean input port receives four Boolean inputs. Figure 6-1 shows the slot assignment for the UPEU and UEIU. Figure 6-1 Slot assignment for the UPEU and UEIU

Table 6-1 lists the ports on the UPEU and UEIU. Table 6-1 Ports on the UPEU and UEIU Slot Slot19 Board UPEU Label EXT-ALM0 Connector RJ-45 connector RJ-45 connector Quantity 1 Description Port for Boolean inputs 8 to 11 Port for Boolean inputs 12 to 15 Port for RS485 input 0 Port for RS485 input 1 Port for Boolean inputs 0 to 3 Port for Boolean inputs 4 to 7 Port for RS485 input 0 Port for RS485 input 1
Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

EXT-ALM1

MON0

RJ-45 connector RJ-45 connector RJ-45 connector RJ-45 connector RJ-45 connector RJ-45 connector

MON1

Slot18

UEIU (optional)

EXT-ALM0

EXT-ALM1

MON0

MON1

6-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BBU3900 Hardware Description

6 DBS3900 Monitoring System

6.2 Monitoring Principles of the Cabinets


The DBS3900 cabinet is monitored by various boards. The boards collect alarms from sensors and fans, and then transmit the alarm signals to the MON port on the BBU through the RS485 serial bus. In this manner, the boards monitor the cabinet.

Monitoring Principles of the DBS3900 in the 110 V AC/220 V AC Power Supply Scenario
The monitoring board varies according to different cabinets. The monitoring boards in the APM30 or TMC are the APMI, AFMU, and PMU. The monitoring boards in the APM30H (Ver.A) or TMC11H (Ver.A) are the HEUA, HPMI, and PMU. The monitoring boards in the APM30H (Ver.B) or TMC1H (Ver.B) are the CMUA, HPMI, and PMU. Figure 6-2 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30+1 TMC+1 BBC or with additional 1 APM30+1 BBC when the BBU is installed in the APM30. The devices monitored by the APMI and AFMU are not shown in the figures. For details, see the description about the boards. l l l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the APMI, see APMI. For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the AFMU, see AFMU. For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is configured only in the APM30.

Figure 6-2 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30
COM COM_IN / COM1 COM_OUT / COM2 ALM0/ALM1 MON0 / MON1 TX RX RS422 PMU AFMU PMU APM30 APMI APM30 APMI AFMU PMU APM30 APMI AFMU

Cable to be connected on site Cable connected before delivery Monitoring from source to destination
TMC APMI AFMU

BBU

BBU

BBC Door Status Sensor

TMC APMI AFMU

BBC Door Status Sensor

BBC Door Status Sensor

Wiring terminal for the surge protection alarm signal cable on the DCDU

Wiring terminal for the surge protection alarm signal cable on the DCDU

Door Status Sensor

Door Status Sensor

Figure 6-3 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 BBC/IBBS or with additional 1 APM30H (Ver.A)+1 BBC/ IBBS when the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.A). The devices monitored by the HEUA and HPMI are not shown in the figures. For details, see the description about the boards. l l l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA. For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HPMI, see HPMI. For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is configured only in the APM30H (Ver.A).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-3

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

6 DBS3900 Monitoring System

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 6-3 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.A)
BAT COM COM_IN / COM1 COM_OUT / COM2 MON0 / MON1 PMU RS422 Cable to be connected on site Cable connected before delivery Monitoring from source to destination TMC11H(Ver.A) HEUA BBU BBU PMU HPMI HEUA PMU HPMI HEUA PMU HPMI HEUA APM30H(Ver.A) APM30H(Ver.A) APM30H(Ver.A)

BBC/IBBS

TMC11H(Ver.A) HEUA

BBC/IBBS

BBC/IBBS

Door status sensor

Door status sensor

Door status sensor

Figure 6-4 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS or with additional 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS when the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B). The devices monitored by the CMUA and HPMI are not shown in the figures. For details, see the description about the boards. l l l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the CMUA, see CMUA. For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HPMI, see HPMI. For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is configured only in the APM30H (Ver.B).

Figure 6-4 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B)
COM PMU COM_IN / COM1 COM_OUT / COM2 COM_485 MON0 / MON1 COM_IN Cable to be connected on site Cable connected before delivery Monitoring from source to destination TMC11H(Ver.B) CMUA BBU BBU PMU CMUA PMU CMUA PMU CMUA APM30H(Ver.B) HPMI APM30H(Ver.B) HPMI APM30H(Ver.B) HPMI

IBBS CMUA

TMC11H(Ver.B) CMUA

IBBS CMUA

IBBS CMUA

Figure 6-5 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS or with additional 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS when the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B). The devices monitored by the CMUA and HPMI are not shown in the figures. For details, see the description about the boards. l l l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the CMUA, see CMUA. For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HPMI, see HPMI. For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is configured only in the APM30H (Ver.B).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

6-4

BBU3900 Hardware Description

6 DBS3900 Monitoring System

Figure 6-5 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B)
TMC11H(Ver.B) CMUA PMU APM30H(Ver.B) HPMI CMUA TMC11H(Ver.B) CMUA PMU APM30H(Ver.B) HPMI CMUA PMU APM30H(Ver.B) HPMI CMUA COM PMU COM_IN / COM1 COM_OUT / COM2 COM_485 MON0 / MON1 BBU BBU COM_IN Cable to be connected on site Cable connected before delivery Monitoring from source to destination IBBS CMUA

IBBS CMUA

IBBS CMUA

IBBS CMUA

IBBS CMUA

IBBS CMUA

Figure 6-6 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the RRU is powered and monitored by the APM30H (Ver.B). The devices monitored by the CMUA and HPMI are not shown in the figures. For details, see the description about the boards. l l l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the CMUA, see CMUA. For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HPMI, see HPMI. For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is configured only in the APM30H (Ver.B).

Figure 6-6 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the RRU is powered and monitored by the APM30H (Ver.B)
ALM COM PMU IN0 OUT1 COM_IN / COM1 COM_OUT / COM2 COM_485 MON0 / MON1 COM_IN Cable to be connected on site Cable connected before delivery Monitoring from source to destination IBBS CMUA APM30H(Ver.B) HPMI PMU CMUA RRU

SLPU

IBBS CMUA

Figure 6-7 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the OMB. The devices monitored by the HEUA is not shown in the figures. For details, see the description about the boards. l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA.

Figure 6-7 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the OMB
OMB COM_IN / COM1 MON0 / MON1 Cable to be connected on site Cable connected before delivery Monitoring from source to destination PMU BBU

HEUA

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-5

6 DBS3900 Monitoring System

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 6-8 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 in the indoor solution of BBU +RRU+ICR and also in the 110 V AC/220 V AC power supply scenario. In this solution, the BBU is installed in the IMB03, and the RRU is installed on the IFS06. l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is configured only in the lower IMB03.

Figure 6-8 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+ICR (110V/220V) scenario
IMB03 COM_IN / COM1 MON0 / MON1 Cable to be connected on site Cable connected before delivery Monitoring from source to destination BBU

IMB03 PMU

Figure 6-9 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 in the indoor solution of BBU +RRU+ICR and also in the 110 V AC/220 V AC power supply scenario. In this solution, the BBU is installed in the IMB03, and the RRUs are installed remotely. Figure 6-9 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+IMB03 (110V/220V) scenario
IMB03 RS232/RS485 MON0 / MON1 Cable to be connected on site Cable connected before delivery Monitoring from source to destination BBU

PMU

Monitoring Principles of the DBS3900 in the -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario


Figure 6-10 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 configured with two TMCs or TMC11Hs when the BBU is installed in the TMC or TMC11H. l l l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the APMI, see APMI. For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA. For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the CMUA, see CMUA.

Figure 6-10 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the TMC or TMC11H
TMC/TMC11H TMC/TMC11H COM_IN / COM1 MON0 / MON1 APMI/HEUA/CMUA APMI/HEUA/CMUA

Cable to be connected on site Cable connected before delivery Monitoring from source to destination

BBU

Figure 6-11 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the OMB. The devices monitored by the HEUA is not shown in the figures. For details, see the description about the boards. l
6-6

For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

6 DBS3900 Monitoring System

Figure 6-11 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the OMB
OMB COM_IN / COM1 MON0 / MON1 Cable to be connected on site Cable connected before delivery Monitoring from source to destination HEUA BBU

Monitoring Principles of the DBS3900 in the +24 V DC Power Supply Scenario


Figure 6-12 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 V DC power supply scenario. l l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the CMUA, see CMUA. For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the power equipment (DC/DC), see Power Subrack (DC/DC).

Figure 6-12 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 DC power supply scenario
COM_IN ALM PRESENT MON0 / MON1 EXT-ALM0 / EXT-ALM1 CMUA APM30H(+24V,Ver.B)

Cable to be connected on site Cable connected before delivery Monitoring from source to destination

Power System (DC/DC)

BBU

Figure 6-13 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 in the indoor solution of BBU +RRU+ICR and also in the +24 V DC power supply scenario. In this solution, the BBU is installed in the IMB03, and the RRU is installed on the IFS06. l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the power equipment (DC/DC), see Power Subrack (DC/DC).

Figure 6-13 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+ICR (+24 V DC) scenario
ALM PRESENT EXT-ALM0 / EXT-ALM1 Cable to be connected on site Cable connected before delivery Monitoring from source to destination BBU IMB03

IMB03
Power System (DC/DC)

For details about the monitoring of the EMUA, see 6.3 Customized Alarm Input. For details about the connections of all monitoring signal cables in the cabinet, see 8.4 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections.

6.3 Customized Alarm Input


If a BBU monitors customer devices, customized alarms about the devices must be reported to the BBU in the following two modes: l l The alarms are collected by the UPEU or UEIU in the BBU. The alarms are collected by the EMUA. For details about software configurations, see the related initial configuration guide.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6-7

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

6 DBS3900 Monitoring System

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Monitoring Board Configuration


If a BBU monitors customer devices, customized alarms about the devices must be reported to the BBU. The configurations of monitoring boards in the BTS3900A depend on the number of customized alarms, as listed in Table 6-2. Table 6-2 Configurations of monitoring boards in the DBS3900 External Power Input -48 V DC/220 V AC Application Scenario Indoor DBS3900 Number of Boolean Signals to be Monitored None 1 to 16 17 to 32 Outdoor DBS3900 None 1 to 16 17 to 32 Monitoring Board Configuration UPEU UPEU+UEIU UPEU+UEIU +EMUA UPEU UPEU+UEIU +(2xUSLP2+SLPU) UPEU+UEIU +EMUA

NOTE

l If backup power is required for the BBU, two UPEUs rather than UPEU+UEIU are configured. l The analog values can be monitored only by the EMUA. l Two USLP2s and one SLPU are delivered in a package. l The EMUA with sensors is configured according to site requirements for the indoor DBS3900.

Customized Alarms Collected by the UPEU or UEIU


Each UPEU or UEIU in the BBU supports eight Boolean alarm inputs. A maximum of two UPEUs or UPEU+UEIU can be configured for the BBU, which means there are 16 Boolean alarm inputs. This method can be used for the configuration of less than 16 customized alarm inputs. If using this method, connect the device to be monitored to the SLPU for surge protection, and then connect the device to the EXT_ALM port on the BBU, as shown in Figure 6-14. Figure 6-14 Customized alarms collected by the UPEU or UEIU

6-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

6 DBS3900 Monitoring System

Customized alarm signals are transmitted to the IN0 to IN3 ports on the USLP2 in the SLPU and then transferred to the EXT_ALM port on the UPEU or EUIU through the alarm cable for the BBU. Table 6-3 describes the relationship between the IN0 to IN3 ports and the number of customized alarms. Table 6-3 Relationship between the IN0 to IN3 ports on the USLP2 and the number of customized alarms Pins of the IN0 to IN3 ports 1 2 3 4 USLP2 in the upper slot IN0 IN1 IN2 IN3 USLP2 in the lower slot IN0 IN1 IN2 IN3

4+ 4(GND) 6(GND) 6+

5+ 5(GND) 7+ 7(GND)

0+ 0(GND) 2(GND) 2+

1+ 1(GND) 3+ 3(GND)

12+ 12(GND) 14(GND) 14+

13+ 13(GND) 15+ 15(GND)

8+ 8(GND) 10(GND) 10+

9+ 9(GND) 11+ 11(GND)

For details about ports on the USLP2, see 10.6.4 USLP2. For details about the wire sequence of the BBU alarm cable, see 9.19 BBU Alarm Cable.
NOTE

The SLPU is configured with two USLP2s by default before delivery when it is used as an alarm signal protection unit. If a BBU is configured with one UPEU, the UPEU must be installed only in the lower slot. In this case, the USLP2 in the upper slot of the SLPU is not used.

Customized Alarms Collected by the EMUA


The EMUA can be configured for the DBS3900 that requires more than 16 Boolean alarm signals. Each EMUA supports 32 Boolean alarm inputs and two RS485 signal inputs. Customized alarms are transmitted to the EMUA that connects to the PMU. Then, the PMU reports the alarms to the CMUA, which transfers the alarms to the BBU through the MON port. For details about cable connections, see Figure 6-15. Figure 6-15 Customized alarms collected by the EMUA (1)

SENSOR

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-9

6 DBS3900 Monitoring System

BBU3900 Hardware Description

If the CPRI port on the RRU is not used to report alarms to the BBU, the serial port on the RRU is used to report alarms to the CMUA that connects to the PMU. Then, the PMU transfers the alarms to the EMUA. For details about cable connections, see Figure 6-16. Figure 6-16 Customized alarms collected by the EMUA (2)

RRU
ALM

COM_OUT

COM_IN

COM_IN

COM_OUT

CMUA

PMU EMUA
RS485
SENSOR

For details about the position of the input port on the EMUA and cable connection between the EMUA and the sensor, see EMUA User Guide.

6-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

7 BBU3900 Equipment

7
About This Chapter
The BBU3900 has the following functions: l l l l l l l

BBU3900 Equipment

This describes the BBU3900 equipment in terms of the appearance, boards and their panels, module, LEDs, ports, and engineering specifications.

Provides ports for communication between the base station and the BSC/RNC Provides CPRI ports for the communication with the RF modules Provides USB ports, which facilitates automatic base station upgrade by allowing a USB disk to be used for software installation and data configuration Provides an OM channel between the base station and the LMT or the M2000 Processes uplink and downlink data Manages the entire dual-mode system in terms of OM and signaling processing Provides the system clock

7.1 Exterior of the BBU3900 The BBU3900, which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 2 U high. 7.2 Boards and Module of the BBU3900 This describes the boards and module of the BBU3900 in terms of their configuration principles, functions, ports, LEDs, and DIP switches.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-1

7 BBU3900 Equipment

BBU3900 Hardware Description

7.1 Exterior of the BBU3900


The BBU3900, which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 2 U high. The dimensions (W x D x H) of the BBU3900 are 442 mm x 310 mm x 86 mm. Figure 7-1 shows the BBU3900. Figure 7-1 BBU3900

The Electronic Serial Number (ESN) is unique to a network element (NE) for identification, and is used during the commissioning of the base station. l If there is a label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on a label and the mounting ears of the BBU. Figure 7-2 shows the position of the ESN. Figure 7-2 The position of the ESN (1)

If there is no label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on the mounting ears of the BBU. Figure 7-3 shows the position of the ESN.

7-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

7 BBU3900 Equipment

Figure 7-3 The position of the ESN (2)

7.2 Boards and Module of the BBU3900


This describes the boards and module of the BBU3900 in terms of their configuration principles, functions, ports, LEDs, and DIP switches. 7.2.1 WMPT The WCDMA Main Processes and Transmission unit (WMPT) of the BBU3900 processes the signals and manages the resources for other boards. 7.2.2 GTMU The GSM Transmission & Timing & Management Unit for BBU (GTMU) is the basic transmission and control function entity of the BBU. It provides the reference clock, maintenance port, and external alarm collection port, monitors the power supply, and controls and manages the entire base station. 7.2.3 LMPT The LTE Main Processing & Transmission Unit (LMPT) is the main control and transmission unit of the BBU3900. It manages the entire eNodeB in terms of OM and signaling processing and provides clock signals for the BBU3900. 7.2.4 WBBP The WCDMA Baseband Process Unit (WBBP) of the BBU3900 processes baseband signals. 7.2.5 LBBP The LTE BaseBand Processing unit (LBBP) in the BBU3900 processes the baseband signals. 7.2.6 FAN The FAN unit of the BBU3900 controls the fan speed, monitors the temperature of the FAN unit, and dissipates the heat in the BBU. 7.2.7 UPEU The Universal Power and Environment Interface Unit (UPEU) is a mandatory board of the BBU3900. It converts -48 V or +24 V DC power to +12 V DC power. 7.2.8 UEIU The Universal Environment Interface Unit (UEIU) transmits monitoring and alarm signals from the external devices to the main control and transmission unit. 7.2.9 UTRP
Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-3

7 BBU3900 Equipment

BBU3900 Hardware Description

This describes the Universal Transmission Processing unit (UTRP) board. As the transmission extension board of the BBU3900, the UTRP provides eight E1s/T1s, one unchannelized STM-1/ OC-3 port, four electrical ports, or two optical ports. 7.2.10 USCU This section describes the Universal Satellite card and Clock Unit (USCU). 7.2.11 UBRI The Universal Baseband Radio Interface Board (UBRI) provides extended CPRI optical or electrical ports to implement convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on the CPRI.

7.2.1 WMPT
The WCDMA Main Processes and Transmission unit (WMPT) of the BBU3900 processes the signals and manages the resources for other boards.

Panel
Figure 7-4 shows the panel of the WMPT. Figure 7-4 Panel of the WMPT

Functions
The WMPT has the following functions: l Provides Operation and Maintenance (OM) functions such as configuration management, equipment management, performance monitoring, signaling processing, and active/ standby switchover and provides OM channels connected to the OMC (LMT or M2000) Provides the reference clock Processes signaling and manages resources for other boards in the BBU3900 Provides USB ports, one of which facilitates automatic base station upgraded when a USB disk is inserted during software installation and data configuration Provides four E1s/T1s which support ATM and IP protocols Provides one FE electrical port and one FE optical port which support the IP protocol

l l l l l

LEDs
Table 7-1 describes the LEDs on the WMPT panel.

7-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

7 BBU3900 Equipment

Table 7-1 LEDs on the WMPT panel Label RUN Color Green Status ON Meaning The power input is available, but the board is faulty. The power supply is unavailable. The board in normal configuration is running properly. The software is being loaded to the board, or the board is not in use. No alarm is generated. The board has alarms on hardware. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode.

OFF 1s ON and 1s OFF

0.125s ON and 0.125s OFF

ALM

Red

OFF ON

ACT

Green

ON OFF

In addition to the previous three LEDs, the WMPT has another six LEDs indicating the connection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, and the commissioning Ethernet port. The six LEDs have no silk screen and are on both sides of each of the three ports. Figure 7-5 shows the LEDs beside the three ports. Figure 7-5 LEDs beside the three ports on the WMPT

Table 7-2 describes the LEDs and their status.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-5

7 BBU3900 Equipment

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Table 7-2 LEDs and their status LED LEDs beside the FE1 optical port Color Green (LINK) Status ON OFF Green (ACT) Blinking OFF LEDs beside the FE0 electrical port Green (LINK) ON OFF Yellow (ACT) Blinking OFF ETH Green (LINK) ON OFF Yellow (ACT) Blinking OFF Meaning The connections are functional. The connections are faulty. Data transmission is ongoing. No data transmission is ongoing. The connections are functional. The connections are faulty. Data transmission is ongoing. No data transmission is ongoing. The connections are functional. The connections are faulty. Data transmission is ongoing. No data transmission is ongoing.

Ports
Table 7-3 describes the ports on the WMPT panel. Table 7-3 Ports on the WMPT panel Label E1/T1 FE0 FE1 GPS Connector Type DB26 connector RJ45 connector SFP female SMA connector Description E1 FE electrical port FE optical port Obligate

7-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

7 BBU3900 Equipment

Label ETH USB TST RST

Connector Type RJ45 connector USB connector USB connector -

Description Commissioning Ethernet port USB loading port USB testing port Resetting the BBU

DIP Switches
The WMPT has two DIP switches: SW1 for setting the E1/T1 working mode and SW2 for setting the protection grounding for the E1/T1 cables receiving 4-way signals. Figure 7-6 shows the DIP switches on the WMPT. Figure 7-6 DIP switches on the WMPT

Table 7-4 and Table 7-5 describe the settings of SW1 and SW2. Table 7-4 Settings of SW1 DIP Switch SW1 DIP Status 1 ON OFF 2 ON OFF 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON T1 Mode The E1 impedance is set to 120 ohms.
7-7

Description

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7 BBU3900 Equipment

BBU3900 Hardware Description

DIP Switch

DIP Status 1 ON 2 ON 3 ON 4 ON

Description

The E1 impedance is set to 75 ohms. Disabled

Other settings of the DIP bits

Table 7-5 Settings of SW2 DIP Switch SW2 DIP Status 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON Balanced Mode Unbalanced Mode Disabled Description

Other settings of the DIP bits

CAUTION
All the DIP bits of SW2 are set to OFF by default. When four E1 links are faulty, you should set all the DIP bits of SW2 to ON so that the faults are rectified.

7.2.2 GTMU
The GSM Transmission & Timing & Management Unit for BBU (GTMU) is the basic transmission and control function entity of the BBU. It provides the reference clock, maintenance port, and external alarm collection port, monitors the power supply, and controls and manages the entire base station.

Panel
The GTMU is classified into two types: GTMU and GTMUb. Figure 7-7 and Figure 7-8 show the panels of the GTMU and GTMUb. Figure 7-7 GTMU panel

7-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

7 BBU3900 Equipment

Figure 7-8 GTMUb panel

NOTE

The GTMU hereinafter mentioned in this document is the first type.

Functions
The GTMU and GTMUb have the following functions: l l l l l l l l l l Controls and manages the base station Supports fault management system, configuration management system, performance management system, and security management system Monitors the fans and power modules Provides and manages the clock source of the base station in centralized mode Provides the clock output for test Provides the FE port for maintenance on the OM system Supports transmission through four E1s and two FEs Provides CPRI ports for communication between the BBU and the RFUs The GTMUb supports interconnected BBUs. Four IDX2 ports on the backplane of the GTMUb can achieve the function of baseband resource pool backup.

LEDs
Table 7-6 describes the LEDs on the GTMU. Table 7-6 LEDs on the GTMU LED RUN Color Green Status ON OFF ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 2s and OFF for 2s
Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Description The board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. The board is running properly. The board is being tested.

7-9

7 BBU3900 Equipment

BBU3900 Hardware Description

LED

Color

Status ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s

Description Software is being loaded to the board. An alarm is generated, indicating a running fault. The board is running properly. The board is in the active state. The board is in the standby state.

ALM

Red

ON OFF

ACT

Green

ON OFF

Besides the preceding three LEDs, there are LEDs indicating the connection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, CPRI port and commissioning port. Each of the LEDs is positioned near the relevant port without any label on the panel of the board. Table 7-7 describes the LEDs and their status. Table 7-7 LEDs and their status LED LIU0 to LIU3 Color Green Status ON ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s OFF CPRI0 to CPRI5 Green Red ON ON Description The link is in the idle state. An E1/T1 remote alarm is generated. The link is functional. The CPRI link is functional. The optical module fails to receive signals. The connection is set up successfully. No connection is set up. Data is being transmitted. No data is being transmitted. The connection is set up successfully.

ETH

Green (LINK LED on the left)

ON OFF

Orange (ACT LED on the right)

Blinking OFF

FE0

Green (LINK LED on the left)

ON

7-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

7 BBU3900 Equipment

LED

Color

Status OFF

Description No connection is set up. Data is being transmitted. No data is being transmitted. The connection is set up successfully. No connection is set up. Data is being transmitted. No data is being transmitted. This is the LED of the reserved port. This is the LED of the reserved port.

Orange (ACT LED on the right)

Blinking OFF

FE1(GTMUb)

Green (LINK LED on the left)

ON OFF

Green (ACT LED on the right)

Blinking OFF

M_S (GTMUb) EXT (GTMUb)

Ports
Table 7-8 describes the ports on the GTMU. Table 7-8 Ports on the GTMU Label CPRI0 to CPRI5 Connector SFP female Description Data transmission port interconnected to the RFU. It supports the input and output of optical and electrical transmission signals Obligate Local maintenance and debugging port Connected to the routers in the equipment room through FE cables to transmit network information Connected to the routers in the equipment room through optical cables to transmit network information Used for automatic software upgrade through the USB disk
7-11

EXT (GTMUb) ETH FE0

SFP female RJ-45 connector RJ-45 connector

FE1

DLC connector

USB

USB connector

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7 BBU3900 Equipment

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Label TST E1/T1

Connector USB connector DB26 female connector

Description Provides a reference clock for the tester Used for four E1/T1 inputs and outputs between the GTMU and the UELP or between BSCs

The RST button on the panel of the GTMU is used for resetting the board.

DIP Switches
On the GTMU, there are five DIP switches, each of which has four bits. DIP switches S1 and S2 must be set together. The functions of the five DIP switches are as follows: l l l l l S1 is used to select the E1 resistance. Table 7-9 provides details on the DIP switch. S2 is used to select the grounding mode of E1/T1 cables. Table 7-10 provides details on the DIP switch. S3 is reserved. S4 is used to select the E1 bypass. Table 7-11 provides details on the DIP switch. S5 is used for timeslot settings when the E1 bypass is selected. Table 7-12 provides details on the DIP switch.

Table 7-9 Details of the DIP Switch S1 DIP Switch S1 Bit Status 1 ON OFF ON 2 ON ON OFF 3 OFF OFF OFF Others 4 OFF OFF OFF The E1 resistance is set to 75 ohm. The E1 resistance is set to 120 ohm. The T1 resistance is set to 100 ohm. Unavailable Description

NOTE

Bits 3 and 4 of S1 should be kept the out-of-factory state, without any manual setting on site. The out-offactory state should be OFF. If the bits are ON, set them to OFF.

7-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

7 BBU3900 Equipment

Table 7-10 Details of the DIP Switch S2 DIP Switch S2 Bit Status 1 OFF 2 OFF 3 OFF 4 OFF By default, all the DIP bits of S2 are set to OFF in all the modes. When the four E1 RX links in 75 ohm have errors, all the bits of S2 must be set to ON to rectify the faults on the E1 links. Unavailable Description

ON

ON

ON

ON

Others

Table 7-11 Details of the DIP Switch S4 DIP Switch S4 Bit Status 1 ON OFF 2 ON OFF 3 ON OFF Others 4 ON OFF Supporting E1 bypass Not supporting E1 bypass Unavailable Description

Table 7-12 Details of the DIP Switch S5 DIP Switch S5 Bit Status 1 ON OFF 2 ON ON 3 ON ON 4 ON OFF Not supporting E1 bypass Supporting E1 bypass of level-1 cascaded base stations Supporting E1 bypass of level-2 cascaded base stations Supporting E1 bypass of level-3 cascaded base stations Description

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-13

7 BBU3900 Equipment

BBU3900 Hardware Description

DIP Switch

Bit Status 1 ON 2 ON 3 OFF 4 OFF

Description

Supporting E1 bypass of level-4 cascaded base stations Supporting E1 bypass of level-5 cascaded base stations

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

NOTE

The E1 bypass function is not supported in this version. All the bits of S4 should be set to OFF, and all the bits of S5 should be set to ON.

7.2.3 LMPT
The LTE Main Processing & Transmission Unit (LMPT) is the main control and transmission unit of the BBU3900. It manages the entire eNodeB in terms of OM and signaling processing and provides clock signals for the BBU3900.

Panel
Figure 7-9 shows the panel of the LMPT. Figure 7-9 Panel of the LMPT

LMPT
LMPTb

TX

RX

TX

RX

RUN ALM ACT

SFP 0

SFP 1

USB TST

ETH

FE/GE0

FE/GE1

RST

GPS

Functions
The LMPT performs the following functions: l l l l Performs configuration management, equipment management, performance monitoring, signal processing, and radio resource management. Controls all boards in the system. Provides the system clock. Processes signals between the eNodeB and the MME/S-GW.

LEDs
The LMPT provides three LEDs on the panel. Table 7-13 describes the LEDs.
7-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

7 BBU3900 Equipment

Table 7-13 LEDs on the LMPT LED RUN Color Green Status On Off On for 1s and off for 1s Description There is power supply, and the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. The board works properly.

On for 0.125s and Software is being loaded to off for 0.125s the board. ALM Red On Off ACT Green On Off The board is reporting alarms. No alarm is generated. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode.

Besides the preceding three LEDs, there are LEDs indicating the connection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, and serial Ethernet port for commissioning. Each of the LEDs is positioned near the relevant port without any label on the panel of the board. Table 7-14 describes the LEDs and their status. Table 7-14 LEDs and their status LED SFP0 and SFP1 Color Green (LINK) Status On Off Orange (ACT) Blinking Description The connection is successful. There is no connection. The port is receiving or transmitting signals. The port is not receiving or transmitting signals. The port is receiving or transmitting signals.

Off

ETH

Orange (ACT)

Blinking

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-15

7 BBU3900 Equipment

BBU3900 Hardware Description

LED

Color

Status Off

Description The port is not receiving or transmitting signals. The connection is successful. There is no connection. The connection is successful. There is no connection. The port is receiving or transmitting signals. The port is not receiving or transmitting signals.

Green (LINK)

On Off

FE/GE0 and FE/GE1

Green (LINK)

On Off

Orange (ACT)

Blinking

Off

Ports
Table 7-15 describes the ports on the LMPT. Table 7-15 Ports on the LMPT Label SFP0 and SFP1 Connector Type LC Quantity 2 Function Ethernet optical ports, which are connected to the transmission device or gateway Loads software to the board Tests Used for commissioning Ethernet electrical ports, which are connected to the transmission device or gateway Receives GPS signals
Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

USB TST ETH FE/GE0 and FE/ GE1

USB USB RJ-45 RJ-45

1 1 1 2

GPS
7-16

SMA

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BBU3900 Hardware Description

7 BBU3900 Equipment

Label RST

Connector Type -

Quantity 1

Function Resets the BBU3900

NOTE

The ports labeled SFP0 and FE/GE0 on the LMPT are for only one GE transmission line, and the two ports cannot be used at the same time. The ports labeled SFP1 and FE/GE1 on the LMPT are for another GE transmission line, and the two ports cannot be used at the same time.

7.2.4 WBBP
The WCDMA Baseband Process Unit (WBBP) of the BBU3900 processes baseband signals.

Panels
The WBBP has three types of panels, as shown in Figure 7-10, Figure 7-11 and Figure 7-12. Figure 7-10 Panel of the WBBPa

Figure 7-11 Panel of the WBBPb

Figure 7-12 Panel of the WBBPd

Functions
The WBBP has the following functions: l l l
Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Provides the CPRI interface for communication between the BBU and the RRU or RFU, and supports the CPRI interface in 1+1 backup mode. Processes uplink and downlink baseband signals. The WBBPd supports interference cancellation (IC) within the board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-17

7 BBU3900 Equipment

BBU3900 Hardware Description

When installed in slot 2 or slot 3, the WBBPd supports the IC function of uplink data.

Table 7-16 describes the specifications of the WBBP. Table 7-16 Specifications of the WBBP Board WBBPa WBBPb1 WBBPb2 WBBPb3 WBBPb4 WBBPd1 WBBPd2 WBBPd3 Number of Cells 3 3 3 6 6 6 6 6 UL CE Number 128 64 128 256 384 192 384 256 DL CE Number 256 64 128 256 384 192 384 256

LEDs
The WBBPa and WBBPb provide three LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links, and the LEDs are positioned below the SFP ports. The WBBPd provides six LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links, and the LEDs are positioned above the SFP ports. Table 7-17 describes the LEDs on the WBBP and their status. Table 7-17 LEDs on the WBBP and their status Label RUN Color Green Status ON OFF Blinking (on for one second and off for one second) Description The board has power input, yet the board is faulty. The power supply or the board is faulty. The board is running properly.

Blinking (on for 0.125 second Software is being loaded to the and off for 0.125 second) board. ACT Green ON OFF ALM Red OFF ON The board is running properly. The WBBP is not in use. The board is running properly. The board has hardware alarms.

7-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

7 BBU3900 Equipment

The WBBPa or WBBPb provides three LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links. The LEDs are positioned below the SFP ports. The WBBPd provides six LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links. The LEDs are positioned above the SFP ports. Table 7-18 describes the LEDs. Table 7-18 LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links Label TX RX Color Red/Green Status Steady green Steady red Description The CPRI link is available. The optical module fails to receive signals. The RRU on the CPRI link is faulty.

Blinking red (ON for 0.125 second and OFF for 0.125 second) Blinking red (ON for one second and OFF for one second) OFF

The CPRI link is out of lock. The SFP module is not in position or the optical module is powered off.

Ports
Table 7-19 describes the three CPRI ports on the panels of the WBBPa and WBBPb. Table 7-19 Ports on the panels of the WBBPa and WBBPb Label CPRIx Connector Type SFP female Description Data transmission port between the BBU and the RF module, supporting input and output of optical and electrical signals

The WBBPd has six ports. Table 7-20 describes the ports on the WBBPd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-19

7 BBU3900 Equipment

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Table 7-20 Ports on the WBBPd Label CPRI0, CPRI1, CPRI2 CPRI3/EIH0, CPRI4/EIH1, CPRI5/EIH2 Connector Type SFP Description Data transmission port between the BBU and the RF module, supporting input and output of optical and electrical signals

NOTE

The six CPRI ports are available on the WBBPd configured only in slot 2 or 3, and the CPRI ports are not available on the WBBPd configured in other port.

7.2.5 LBBP
The LTE BaseBand Processing unit (LBBP) in the BBU3900 processes the baseband signals.

Panel
The LBBP has two types of panels, as shown in Figure 7-13 and Figure 7-14. Figure 7-13 Panel of the LBBP
LBBP
LBBPb
TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX
RUN ALM ACT

CPRI 0

CPRI 1

CPRI 2

CPRI 3

CPRI 4

CPRI 5

Figure 7-14 Panel of the LBBP


LBBP
LBBPc
TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX
RUN ALM ACT

CPRI 0

CPRI 1

CPRI 2

CPRI 3

CPRI 4

CPRI 5

Function
The LBBP has the following functions: l l Processes uplink and downlink baseband signals Provides CPRI ports connected to RF modules

Table 7-21 describes the specifications of the LBBP. Table 7-21 Specifications of the LBBP Board LBBPb
7-20

Number of Cells 3

Bandwidth of the Cell 10M

Antenna Configuration 2T2R


Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BBU3900 Hardware Description

7 BBU3900 Equipment

Board

Number of Cells 1 1

Bandwidth of the Cell 20M 10M 20M 10M 20M

Antenna Configuration 2T2R 4T4R 2T2R 2T2R 4T4R

LBBPc

3 6 1

LED
There are three LEDs on the panel of the LBBP. Table 7-22 describes the LEDs on the LBBP. Table 7-22 LEDs on the LBBP Label RUN Color Green Status On Description There is power supply, and the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. The board is running properly. Data is being loaded to the board, or the board is not started. An alarm is reported, indicating a fault in the board. The board is normal. The board works in active mode. The board works in standby mode.

Off

On for 1s and off for 1s On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s ALM Red On

Off ACT Green On Off

The LBBP provides six LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links. The LEDs are positioned above the SFP ports. Table 7-23 describes the LEDs.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-21

7 BBU3900 Equipment

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Table 7-23 LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links Label TX RX Color Red/Green Status Steady green Steady red Description The CPRI link is available. The optical module fails to receive signals. The RRU on the CPRI link is faulty. The CPRI link is out of lock (Clock synchronization is not achieved for the CPRI signals). The SFP module is not in position or the optical module is powered off.

Blinking red (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s)

Off

Port
Table 7-24 describes the ports on the panel of the LBBP. Table 7-24 Ports on the LBBP Label CPRI0 to CPRI5 Connector SFP female Quantity 6 Description The CPRI ports connect to the LRRUs or LRFUs for transmitting service data, clock signals, and synchronization information

7.2.6 FAN
The FAN unit of the BBU3900 controls the fan speed, monitors the temperature of the FAN unit, and dissipates the heat in the BBU.

Panel
Figure 7-15 shows the panel of the FAN unit.
7-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

7 BBU3900 Equipment

Figure 7-15 Panel of the FAN unit

Functions
The FAN unit performs the following functions: l l l l Controls the fan speed. Reports the fan status to the main control board. Monitors the temperature of the air inlets. Dissipates the heat.

LEDs
The FAN unit has one LED, indicating the running status of the module. Table 7-25 describes the LED on the FAN unit and its status. Table 7-25 LED on the FAN unit and its status Label STATE Color Green Status On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s On for 1s and off for 1s Red Off On for 1s and off for 1s Description The module is not registered, and no alarm is reported. The module is running properly. No alarm is reported. The module is reporting alarms.

7.2.7 UPEU
The Universal Power and Environment Interface Unit (UPEU) is a mandatory board of the BBU3900. It converts -48 V or +24 V DC power to +12 V DC power.
Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-23

7 BBU3900 Equipment

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Panels
The UPEU is classified into the Universal Power and Environment Interface Unit Type A (UPEUA) and the Universal Power and Environment Interface Unit Type B (UPEUB). The UPEUA converts -48 V DC power to +12 V DC power and the UPEUB converts +24 V DC power to +12 V DC power. Figure 7-16 shows the UPEUA panel and Figure 7-17 shows the UPEUB panel. Figure 7-16 Panel of the UPEUA

(1) Power switch of the BBU

Figure 7-17 Panel of the UPEUB

(1) Power switch of the BBU

Functions
The UPEU performs the following functions: l l l l Converts -48 V DC or +24 V DC power to +12 V DC power that is applicable to the boards Provides two ports for two RS485 inputs and two ports for eight Boolean signals Provides reverse connection protection for power cable connectors If two UPEUs are configured, two power inputs are required. The UPEU in slot 19 works in active mode, and the UPEU in slot 18 works in standby mode

LEDs
The UPEU has one LED that indicates the operating status of the board. Table 7-26 describes the LED and its status.
7-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

7 BBU3900 Equipment

Table 7-26 LED on the UPEU and its status Label RUN Color Green Status On Off Description The UPEU is operational. Input power is unavailable or the board is faulty.

Ports
The UPEU provides two RS485 ports and two ports for eight Boolean signals. When configured in different slots, the ports on the UPEU have different functions. Figure 7-18 shows the slots in the BBU. Figure 7-18 Slots in the BBU

Table 7-27 describes the ports on the panel of the UPEU. Table 7-27 Ports on the panel of the UPEU Slot Slot 19 Label PWR EXTALM0 EXTALM1 MON0 MON1 Slot 18 PWR EXTALM0 Connecto r 3V3 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 3V3 RJ-45 Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Description Port for +24 V DC or -48 V DC input power Port for Boolean signal inputs 0 to 3 Port for Boolean signal inputs 4 to 7 Port for RS485 signal input 0 Port for RS485 signal input 1 Port for +24 V DC or -48 V DC input power Port for Boolean signal inputs 0 to 3

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-25

7 BBU3900 Equipment

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Slot

Label EXTALM1 MON0 MON1

Connecto r RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45

Quantity 1 1 1

Description Port for Boolean signal inputs 4 to 7 Port for RS485 signal input 0 Port for RS485 signal input 1

7.2.8 UEIU
The Universal Environment Interface Unit (UEIU) transmits monitoring and alarm signals from the external devices to the main control and transmission unit.

Panel
Figure 7-19 shows the panel of the UEIU. Figure 7-19 Panel of the UEIU

Functions
The UEIU performs the following functions: l l l Provides two ports, each transmitting one RS485 signal. Provides two ports, each transmitting four boolean signals. Transmits monitoring signals and alarm signals from external devices to the main control and transmission unit.

Ports
The UEIU is configured in slot 18. It provides four ports with two ports transmitting two RS485 input signals and the other two ports transmitting eight Boolean signals. Table 7-28 describes the ports on the panel of the UEIU.

7-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

7 BBU3900 Equipment

Table 7-28 Ports on the panel of the UEIU Slot slot 18 Label EXTALM0 EXTALM1 MON0 MON1 Connect or RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 RJ-45 Quanti ty 1 1 1 1 Description No.0 to 3 Boolean signal input ports No.4 to 7 Boolean signal input ports No.0 RS485 signal input port No.1 RS485 signal input port

7.2.9 UTRP
This describes the Universal Transmission Processing unit (UTRP) board. As the transmission extension board of the BBU3900, the UTRP provides eight E1s/T1s, one unchannelized STM-1/ OC-3 port, four electrical ports, or two optical ports.

Specification
Table 7-29 describes the specifications of the UTRP. Table 7-29 Specifications of the UTRP Board UTRP2 UTRP3 UTRP4 UTRPb4 UTRP6 UTRP9 Sub-board/Board Type UEOC UAEC UIEC UUAS UQEC Port Two universal FE/GE optical port Ports for eight channels of ATM over E1/T1 Ports for eight channels of IP over E1/T1 Ports for eight channels of TDM over E1/T1 Port for one unchannelized STM-1/OC-3 Four universal FE/GE electrical ports

Panels
Figure 7-20 shows the panel of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-27

7 BBU3900 Equipment

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 7-20 Panel of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports

Figure 7-21 shows the panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4 supporting eight E1s/T1s. Figure 7-21 Panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4 supporting eight E1s/T1s
UTRP
E1/T1(0-3) E1/T1(4-7)
RUN ALM ACT

Figure 7-22 shows the panel of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1. Figure 7-22 Panel of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1

Figure 7-23 shows the panel of the UTRP9 supporting four electrical ports. Figure 7-23 Panel of the UTRP supporting four electrical ports

Functions
The UTRP has the following functions: l l l l The UTRP2 provides two 100M/1000M Ethernet optical ports, performs functions of the MAC layer, receives and transmits data on Ethernet links, and analyzes the MAC address. The UTRP3 provides eight E1s/T1s and performs inverse multiplexing and demultiplexing on a single ATM cell flow on the eight E1/T1 links. The UTRP4 provides eight E1s/T1s, frames and deframes HDLC frames, and allocates and controls the 256 HDLC timeslot channels. The UTRP4 provides an E1/T1 port for four TDM transmission links in GSM mode and provides a port for four transmission links in another mode for co-transmission in a dualmode base station. The UTRP6 supports one unchannelized STM-1/OC-3 port. The UTRP9 provides four 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet electrical ports and performs the functions of the MAC layer and physical layer.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

l l

7-28

BBU3900 Hardware Description

7 BBU3900 Equipment

The cold backup is supported.

LEDs
Table 7-30 describes the LEDs on the panel of the UTRP. Table 7-30 LEDs on the panel of the UTRP Label RUN Color Green Status ON Description The board has power input, but the board is faulty. The board has no power input, or the board is faulty. The board is running properly. The board is not configured or is loading software. The board is in the offline state or under test. The board is reporting alarms. The board is running properly. The board is reporting a minor alarm. The board is reporting a major alarm. The board is reporting a critical alarm. The board is in active mode. The board is in standby mode.

OFF

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ON for 2s and OFF for 2s ALM Red ON or blinking rapidly OFF ON for 2s and OFF for 2s ON for 1s and OFF for 1s ON for 0.125s and OFF for 0.125s ACT Green ON OFF

UTRP2 and UTRP9 provide two LEDs for indicating the status of the current link. Table 7-31 describes the LEDs on the Ethernet ports of the UTRP2 and UTRP9.
Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-29

7 BBU3900 Equipment

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Table 7-31 LEDs on the Ethernet ports of the UTRP2 and UTRP9 Label LINK Color Green Status OFF ON ACT Orange Blinking OFF Description The link is disconnected. The link is properly connected. The link is receiving or transmitting data. The link is not receiving or transmitting data.

Ports
Table 7-32 describes the ports of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports. Table 7-32 Ports of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports Label FE/GE0 to FE/GE1 Port Type FE/GE optical port Quantity 2 Connector Type SFP connector

Table 7-33 describes the ports on the UTRP3 and UTRP4 supporting eight E1s/T1s. Table 7-33 Ports on the panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4 an UTRPb4 supporting eight E1s/T1s Label E1/T1 Port Type E1/T1 port Quantity 2 Connector Type DB26 connector

Table 7-34 describes the port of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1. Table 7-34 Port of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1 Label STM-1/OC-3 Port Type STM-1/OC-3 port Quantity 1 Connector Type SFP connector

Table 7-35 describes the ports of the UTRP9 supporting four electrical ports.

7-30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

7 BBU3900 Equipment

Table 7-35 Ports of the UTRP9 supporting four electrical ports Label FE/GE0 to FE/GE3 Port Type FE/GE electrical port Quantity 4 Connector Type RJ-45 connector

DIP Switches
There is no DIP switch on the UTRP2, UTRP6, and UTRP9. The UTRP3, UTRP4, or UTRPb4 has three DIP switches numbered from SW1 to SW3. SW1 and SW2 are used to set the grounding status of the eight E1s. SW3 is used to set matched impedance for the eight E1s. Figure 7-24 shows the DIP switch on the UTRP3 or UTRP4, Figure 7-25 shows the DIP switch on the UTRPb4. Figure 7-24 DIP switch on the UTRP3 or UTRP4

Figure 7-25 DIP switch on the UTRPb4

Table 7-36, Table 7-37, and Table 7-38 describe how to set the DIP switches on the UTRP.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-31

7 BBU3900 Equipment

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Table 7-36 DIP switch SW1 on the UTRP DIP Switch SW1 DIP Status 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON Balanced Mode Unbalanced Mode Disabled Description

Other settings of the DIP bits

Table 7-37 DIP switch SW2 on the UTRP DIP Switch SW2 DIP Status 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON Balanced Mode Unbalanced Mode Disabled Description

Other settings of the DIP bits

CAUTION
SW1 and SW2 are set to OFF (balanced mode) by default. When the eight E1s are faulty, all the DIP bits of SW1 and SW2 should be set to ON to rectify faults. SW1 corresponds to E1s No.4 to No.7 and SW2 corresponds to E1s No.0 to No.3.

Table 7-38 DIP switch SW3 on the UTRP DIP Switch SW3 DIP Status 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 ON OFF 4 ON OFF T1 Mode The E1 impedance is set to 120 ohms. Description

7-32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

7 BBU3900 Equipment

DIP Switch

DIP Status 1 ON 2 ON 3 ON 4 ON

Description

The E1 impedance is set to 75 ohms. Disabled

Other settings of the DIP bits

7.2.10 USCU
This section describes the Universal Satellite card and Clock Unit (USCU).

Panel
There are two types of USCU: USCUb1 and USCUb2, as shown in Figure 7-26 and Figure 7-27. Figure 7-26 Panel of the USCUb1 (0.5 U)

Figure 7-27 Panel of the USCUb2 (1 U)

(1) GPS port

(2) RGPS port

(3) TOD port

(4) M-1PPS port

(5) BITS port

Functions
The USCU has the following functions: l The USCU provides interface for an external RGPS device (such as a reused device of the operator), Metro1000 device, BITS device, and TOD input.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7-33

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

7 BBU3900 Equipment

BBU3900 Hardware Description

l l

The USCUb1 has the GPS receiver. It is used for clock synchronization or obtaining accurate clock signals from transmission devices. The USCUb2 has the GPS/GLONASS receiver.

LED
Table 7-39 and Table 7-40 describe the LEDs on the USCU. Table 7-39 LEDs on the USCU LED RUN Color Green Status On Off Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s) ALM Red Off On Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s) Description There is power supply, and the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is faulty. The board is running properly. Software is being loaded to the board, or the board is not configured. The board is running properly, and no alarm is generated. An alarm is generated, and the board needs to be replaced. An alarm is generated. The alarm may be caused due to faults in the related boards or ports. Therefore, whether the board needs to be replaced cannot be determined. The serial port for communication between the USCU and the main control board is enabled. The serial port for communication between the USCU and the main control board is disabled.

ACT

Green

On

Off

7-34

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

7 BBU3900 Equipment

Table 7-40 LEDs on the TOD port Color Green Meaning On: The TOD port is configured as the input port. Off: The TOD port is configured as the output port. Default Configuration The green LED of the TOD0 port is off, and the yellow LED of the TOD0 port is on. The yellow LED of the TOD1 port is off, and the green LED of the TOD1 port is on.

Yellow

Ports
Table 7-41 describes the ports on the USCU. Table 7-41 Ports on the USCU Port GPS port RGPS port TOD0 port TOD1 port BITS port Connector SMA coaxial connector PCB welded wiring terminal RJ-45 connector RJ-45 connector SMA coaxial connector SMA coaxial connector Description Receives GPS signals Receives RGPS signals Receives or transmits 1PPS+TOD signals Receives or transmits 1PPS+TOD signals, and receives TOD signals from the M1000 Receives BITS clock signals, and supports adaptive input of 2.048 MHz and 10 MHz clock reference source Receives 1PPS signals from the M1000

M-1PPS port

7.2.11 UBRI
The Universal Baseband Radio Interface Board (UBRI) provides extended CPRI optical or electrical ports to implement convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on the CPRI.

Panel
Figure 7-28 shows the panel of the UBRI. Figure 7-28 Panel of the UBRI

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-35

7 BBU3900 Equipment

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Functions
The UBRI performs the following functions: l l Provides extended CPRI optical or electrical ports Performs convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on the CPRI

LEDs
Table 7-42 describes the LEDs on the panel of the UBRI. Table 7-42 LEDs on the panel of the UBRI LED RUN Color Green State ON steady Description There is power supply, but the board is faulty. There is no power supply, or the board is in the alarm status. The board works properly. The board is loading software. The board is in the alarm status. No alarm is generated. The board works properly. The board is not working.

OFF steady

1s ON, 1s OFF 0.125s ON, 0.125s OFF ALM Red ON or blinking at a high frequency OFF steady ACT Green ON steady OFF steady

The UBRI provides six LEDs indicating the status of the CRRI links, which are above the SFP ports. Table 7-43 describes the CPRI link status LED. Table 7-43 CPRI link status LED Label CPRIx Color Red/Green State ON (green) Description The CPRI link is available.
Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

7-36

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BBU3900 Hardware Description

7 BBU3900 Equipment

Label

Color

State ON (red)

Description The optical module fails to receive signals. The RRU on the CPRI link is faulty. The CPRI link is out of lock.

0.125s ON, 0.125s OFF (Red) 1s ON, 1s OFF (red)

Ports
Table 7-44 describes the ports on the panel of the UBRI. Table 7-44 Ports on the panel of the UBRI Label CPRI0 to CPRI5 Connector SFP female Port Quantity 6 Description Connecting the BBU and the RF module

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-37

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Cable Connections of the DBS3900

About This Chapter


The connections of the CPRI cables, transmission cables, and monitoring signal cables of the DBS3900 vary according to the external input power and combinations of the cabinet configured in the DBS3900. 8.1 Power Cable Connections To meet the requirements of 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power inputs, Huawei provides a series of power equipment such as the PDU, EPS, and PSU. The power equipment converts 110 V AC/220 V AC power into -48 V DC and provides power to customer equipment. 8.2 Transmission Cable Connections The transmission cable connections vary according the working modes of the indoor DBS3900 and outdoor DBS3900. 8.3 CPRI Cable Connections The CPRI cable connections in the DBS3900 vary according to the working modes of the DBS3900. 8.4 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections The monitoring signal cable connections are different for the distributed base station in 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supply scenarios.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-1

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8.1 Power Cable Connections


To meet the requirements of 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power inputs, Huawei provides a series of power equipment such as the PDU, EPS, and PSU. The power equipment converts 110 V AC/220 V AC power into -48 V DC and provides power to customer equipment.

Power Cable Connections in the 110 V AC/220 V AC Power Supply Scenario


When the input power is 110 V AC/220 V AC power, a distributed base station is in the configuration of 1 APM30+1 TMC+1 BBC. The APM30 is configured with the PDU, which converts 110 V AC/220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides power to the BBU, RRU, and TMC. Figure 8-1 shows the power cable connections. Figure 8-1 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30+1 TMC +1 BBC

Table 8-1 describes the power cable connections. Table 8-1 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30+1 TMC +1 BBC Cable Number P1 P2 and P5
8-2

Cable Description Input Power Cable of the Power Cabinet Power cable for the fan box

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Cable Number P3 P4 P6 and P8 P7

Cable Description 9.3 BBU Power Cable Input Power Cable of the APM30 Transmission Cabinet Input Power Cable of the Heating Film Input Power Cable of the Heater

When a base station is in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 BBC, the APM30H (Ver. A) is configured with the PDU, which converts 110 V AC/220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides power to the BBU, RRU and TMC11H (Ver. A). Figure 8-2 shows the power cable connections. Figure 8-2 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 BBC

Table 8-2 describes the power cable connections. Table 8-2 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 BBC Cable Number P1 Cable Description Input Power Cable of the APM30H Power Cabinet
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-3

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Cable Number P2 and P5 P3 P4 P6 and P8 P7

Cable Description Power cable for the fan box 9.3 BBU Power Cable Input Power Cable of the TMC11H Input Power Cable of the Heating Film Input Power Cable of the Heater

When a base station is in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 IBBS200T, the APM30H (Ver. A) is configured with the PDU, which converts 110 V AC/220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides power to the BBU, RRU and TMC11H (Ver. A). Figure 8-3 shows the power cable connections. Figure 8-3 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 IBBS200T

Table 8-3 describes the power cable connections. Table 8-3 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 IBBS200T Cable Number P1
8-4

Cable Description Input Power Cables for the APM30H

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Cable Number P2 and P5 P3 P4 P6 and P7

Cable Description Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H 9.3 BBU Power Cable Input Power Cable for the TMC11H Power Cables for the Batteries

When a base station is in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+1 IBBS200D, the APM30H (Ver. B) is configured with the EPS, which converts 110 V AC/220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides power to the BBU, RRU and TMC11H (Ver. B). Figure 8-4 shows the power cable connections. Figure 8-4 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+1 IBBS200D

Table 8-4 describes the power cable connections. Table 8-4 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+1 IBBS200D Cable Number P1 and P10 P2 and P11
Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Cable Description Power cable for the junction box Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-5

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Cable Number P3 P4 and P5 P6 P7 P8 P9

Cable Description 9.3 BBU Power Cable Power Cables for the Batteries Input Power Cables for the APM30H RRU Power Cable Input Power Cable for the TMC11H Power cable for the heating film

Figure 8-5 shows the power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+1 IBBS200T. Figure 8-5 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+1 IBBS200T

Table 8-5 describes the power cable connections. Table 8-5 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+1 IBBS200T Cable Number P1 and P9
8-6

Cable Description Power cable for the junction box

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Cable Number P2 and P10 P3 P4 and P5 P6 P7 P8

Cable Description Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H 9.3 BBU Power Cable Power Cables for the TEC Cooler Input Power Cables for the APM30H RRU Power Cable Input Power Cable for the TMC11H

Figure 8-6 shows the power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+2 IBBS200D. Figure 8-6 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+2 IBBS200D

Table 8-6 describes the power cable connections. Table 8-6 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+2 IBBS200D Cable Number P1 and P10
Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Cable Description Power cable for the junction box

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-7

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Cable Number P2, P6, and P12 P3 P4 and P5 P7 P8 P9 P11 P13 and P14

Cable Description Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H 9.3 BBU Power Cable Power Cables for the Fans in the IBBS200D Input Power Cables for the APM30H RRU Power Cable Power cable for the heating film Input Power Cable for the TMC11H Power Cables for the Batteries

Figure 8-7 shows the power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+2 IBBS200T. Figure 8-7 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+2 IBBS200T

Table 8-7 describes the power cable connections.

8-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 8-7 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+2 IBBS200T Cable Number P1 and P9 P2, P6, and P11 P3 P4 and P5 P7 P8 P10 P12 and P13 Cable Description Power cable for the junction box Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H 9.3 BBU Power Cable Power Cables for the TEC Cooler Input Power Cables for the APM30H RRU Power Cable Input Power Cable for the TMC11H Power Cables for the Batteries

Power Cable Connections in the 110 V AC/220 V AC Power Supply Scenario


When the input power is -48 V DC, a distributed base station is configured with two TMCs. The TMCs are configured with the DCDU-03Bs, which provide power to the BBU and RRU or transmission equipment. Figure 8-8 describes the power cable connections. Figure 8-8 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMCs

Table 8-8 describes the power cable connections. Table 8-8 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMCs Cable Number P1 P2 P3 Cable Description Input Power Cable of the APM30 Transmission Cabinet Power cable for the fan box 9.3 BBU Power Cable

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-9

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

When two TMC11Hs (Ver. A) are configured, the DCDU-03B in the TMC11H (Ver. A) provides power to the BBU and RRU. Figure 8-9 shows the power cable connections. Figure 8-9 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. A)

Table 8-9 describes the power cable connections. Table 8-9 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. A) Cable Number P1 P2 P3 Cable Description Input Power Cable of the APM30 Transmission Cabinet Power cable for the fan box 9.3 BBU Power Cable

When two TMC11Hs (Ver. B) are configured, the DCDU-03B in the TMC11H (Ver. B) provides power to the BBU and RRU. Figure 8-10 describes the power cable connections. Figure 8-10 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. B)

Table 8-10 describes the power cable connections.

8-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 8-10 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. B) Cable Number P1 P2 P3 Cable Description Input Power Cable for the TMC11H Power Cable for the Fan Box in the TMC11H 9.3 BBU Power Cable

8.2 Transmission Cable Connections


The transmission cable connections vary according the working modes of the indoor DBS3900 and outdoor DBS3900. 8.2.1 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM Only Base Station In a GSM only base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable can be used for data transmission. 8.2.2 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM Only Base Station In a GSM base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable can be used for data transmission. 8.2.3 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor UMTS Only Base Station In a UMTS base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable can be used for data transmission. 8.2.4 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor UMTS Only Base Station In a UMTS base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable can be used for data transmission. 8.2.5 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor LTE Only Base Station In an LTE only base station, the E1/T1 cable or FE/GE optical cable can be used for data transmission. 8.2.6 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor LTE Only Base Station In an LTE only base station, the E1/T1 cable or FE/GE optical cable can be used for data transmission. 8.2.7 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in CoTransmission Mode When a GSM+UMTS base station works in co-transmission mode, TDM co-transmission or IP co-transmission can be used. 8.2.8 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in CoTransmission Mode When a GSM+UMTS base station works in co-transmission mode, TDM co-transmission or IP co-transmission can be used. 8.2.9 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode When a GSM+UMTS base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transmission links can be configured for the GSM side and UMTS side. This section describes only two typical manners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-11

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8.2.10 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode When a GSM+UMTS base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transmission links can be configured for the GSM side and UMTS side. This section describes only two typical manners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode. 8.2.11 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Route Backup Transmission Mode A GSM+UMTS base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnection between the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the GTMU and WMPT panels. Based on the co-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the GTMU and WMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used for interconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the BSC and RNC. 8.2.12 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Route Backup Transmission Mode A GSM+UMTS base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnection between the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the GTMU and WMPT panels. Based on the co-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the GTMU and WMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used for interconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the BSC and RNC. 8.2.13 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in CoTransmission Mode In a GSM+LTE base station, IP co-transmission can be implemented by interconnecting the FE ports on the GTMU panel and the LMPT panel and using the FE/GE port on the LMPT or the E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP as the shared port for data transmission. 8.2.14 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in CoTransmission Mode In a GSM+LTE base station, IP co-transmission can be implemented by interconnecting the FE ports on the GTMU panel and the LMPT panel and using the FE/GE port on the LMPT or the E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP as the shared port for data transmission. 8.2.15 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode When a GSM+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport links can be configured for the GSM side and LTE side. This section describes two typical manners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode. 8.2.16 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode When a GSM+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport links can be configured for the GSM side and LTE side. This section describes two typical manners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode. 8.2.17 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Route Backup Transmission Mode A GSM+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnection between the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the GTMU and LMPT panels. Based on the cotransmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the GTMU and LMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used for interconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the transport network. 8.2.18 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Route Backup Transmission Mode A GSM+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnection between the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the GTMU and LMPT panels. Based on the co8-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the GTMU and LMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used for interconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the transport network. 8.2.19 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in CoTransmission Mode In a UMTS+LTE base station, IP co-transmission can be implemented by interconnecting the FE ports on the WMPT panel and the LMPT panel and using the FE/GE port on the LMPT or the E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP as the shared port for data transmission. 8.2.20 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in CoTransmission Mode In a UMTS+LTE base station, IP co-transmission can be implemented by interconnecting the FE ports on the WMPT panel and the LMPT panel and using the FE/GE port on the LMPT or the E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP as the shared port for data transmission. 8.2.21 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode When a UMTS+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport links can be configured for the UMTS side and the LTE side. This section describes two typical manners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode. 8.2.22 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode When a UMTS+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport links can be configured for the UMTS side and the LTE side. This section describes two typical manners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode. 8.2.23 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Route Backup Transmission Mode A UMTS+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnection between the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the WMPT and LMPT panels. Based on the co-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the WMPT and LMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used for interconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the transport network. 8.2.24 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Route Backup Transmission Mode A UMTS+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnection between the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the WMPT and LMPT panels. Based on the co-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the WMPT and LMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used for interconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the transport network. 8.2.25 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Hybrid Transmission Mode A UMTS+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnection between the FE ports on the WMPT and LMPT panels. Based on the co-transmission, hybrid transmission can be implemented. That is, the UMTS E1/T1 port and LTE FE/GE port are used as shared ports for data transmission. The E1/T1 port is used to transmit the services with high QoS requirements, such as CS services. The FE/GE port is used to transmit the services with low QoS requirements, such as PS services. 8.2.26 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Hybrid Transmission Mode A UMTS+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnection between the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the WMPT and LMPT panels. Based on the
Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-13

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

co-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the WMPT and LMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used for interconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the transport network.

8.2.1 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM Only Base Station
In a GSM only base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable can be used for data transmission.

Transmission over the E1 Cable


Figure 8-11 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cable is used for data transmission in a GSM only base station where only the GTMU is configured as the transmission board in the BBU3900. Figure 8-11 E1/T1 cable connections

Table 8-11 describes the cable connections. Table 8-11 E1/T1 cable connections Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

Figure 8-12 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cable is used for data transmission in a GSM only base station where the GTMU and UTRP4 are configured as transmission boards in the BBU3900. Figure 8-12 E1/T1 cable connections

Table 8-12 describes the cable connections.


8-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 8-12 E1/T1 cable connections Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4 Cable Description See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

Transmission over the FE Cable


Figure 8-13 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM only base station when the FE/GE Ethernet cable is used for data transmission. Figure 8-13 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections

Table 8-13 describes the cable connections. Table 8-13 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-14 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM only base station when the FE/GE optical cable is used for data transmission. Figure 8-14 FE/GE optical cable connections

Table 8-14 describes the cable connections.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-15

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Table 8-14 FE/GE optical cable connections Cable Number T1 Cable Description See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

8.2.2 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM Only Base Station
In a GSM base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable can be used for data transmission.

Transmission over the E1 Cable


Figure 8-15 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cable is used for data transmission. Figure 8-15 E1/T1 cable connections

Table 8-15 describes the cable connections. Table 8-15 E1/T1 cable connections Cable Number T1 Cable Description See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

Transmission over the FE Cable


Figure 8-16 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE Ethernet cable is used for data transmission. Figure 8-16 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections

Table 8-16 describes the cable connections.


8-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 8-16 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections Cable Number T1 Cable Description See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-17 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE optical cable is used for data transmission. Figure 8-17 FE/GE optical cable connections

Table 8-17 describes the cable connections. Table 8-17 FE/GE optical cable connections Cable Number T1 Cable Description See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

8.2.3 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor UMTS Only Base Station
In a UMTS base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable can be used for data transmission.

Transmission over the E1 Cable


Figure 8-18 shows the transmission cable connections when only the E1/T1 cable is used for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU. Figure 8-18 E1/T1 cable connections (1)

Table 8-18 describes the cable connections.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-17

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Table 8-18 E1/T1 cable connections (1) Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

Figure 8-19 shows the transmission cable connections when only the E1/T1 cable is used for data transmission in a base station where the WMPT and UTRP3 (or UTRP4) are configured as the main control board in the BBU. Figure 8-19 E1/T1 cable connections (2)

Table 8-19 describes the cable connections. Table 8-19 E1/T1 cable connections (2) Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4 Cable Description See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

Transmission over the FE Cable


Figure 8-20 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE Ethernet cable is used for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU. Figure 8-20 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1)

Table 8-20 describes the cable connections.


8-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 8-20 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1) Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-21 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE Ethernet cable is used for data transmission in a base station where the WMPT and the UTRP9 are configured in the BBU. Figure 8-21 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2)

Table 8-21 describes the cable connections. Table 8-21 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2) Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4 Cable Description See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-22 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE optical cable is used for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU. Figure 8-22 FE/GE optical cable connections (1)

Table 8-22 describes the cable connections.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-19

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Table 8-22 FE/GE optical cable connections (1) Cable Number T1 Cable Description See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Figure 8-23 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE optical cable is used for data transmission in a base station where the WMPT and the UTRP2 are configured in the BBU. Figure 8-23 FE/GE optical cable connections (2)

Table 8-23 describes the cable connections. Table 8-23 FE/GE optical cable connections (2) Cable Number T1 and T2 Cable Description See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

8.2.4 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor UMTS Only Base Station
In a UMTS base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable can be used for data transmission.

Transmission over the E1 Cable


Figure 8-24 shows the transmission cable connections when only the E1/T1 cable is used for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU. Figure 8-24 E1/T1 cable connections (1)

Table 8-24 describes the cable connections.


8-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 8-24 E1/T1 cable connections (1) Cable Number T1 Cable Description See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

Figure 8-25 shows the transmission cable connections when only the E1/T1 cable is used for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT and UTRP3/UTRP4 is configured in the BBU. Figure 8-25 E1/T1 cable connections (2)

Table 8-25 describes the cable connections. Table 8-25 E1/T1 cable connections (2) Cable Number T1 and T2 Cable Description See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

Transmission over the FE Cable


Figure 8-26 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE Ethernet cable is used for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU. Figure 8-26 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1)

Table 8-26 describes the cable connections. Table 8-26 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1) Cable Number T1 Cable Description See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-21

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 8-27 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE Ethernet cable is used for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT and UTRP9 is configured in the BBU. Figure 8-27 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2)

Table 8-27 describes the cable connections. Table 8-27 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2) Cable Number T1 and T2 Cable Description See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-28 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE optical cable is used for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU. Figure 8-28 FE/GE optical cable connections (1)

Table 8-28 describes the cable connections. Table 8-28 FE/GE optical cable connections (1) Cable Number T1 Cable Description See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Figure 8-29 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE optical cable is used for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT and UTRP2 is configured in the BBU. Figure 8-29 FE/GE optical cable connections (2)

8-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 8-29 describes the cable connections. Table 8-29 FE/GE optical cable connections (2) Cable Number T1 and T2 Cable Description See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

8.2.5 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor LTE Only Base Station
In an LTE only base station, the E1/T1 cable or FE/GE optical cable can be used for data transmission.

Transmission over the E1/T1 Cable


When the E1/T1 cable is used for data transmission, the UTRP is required. Figure 8-30 shows the transmission cable connections. Figure 8-30 E1/T1 cable connections

Table 8-30 describes the cable connections. Table 8-30 E1/T1 cable connections Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4 Cable Description See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

Transmission over the FE Cable


When an LTE only base station uses FE/GE transmission, the FE/GE optical cable is usually used for data transmission. Figure 8-31 shows the transmission cable connections. Figure 8-31 FE/GE optical cable connections

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-23

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Table 8-31 describes the cable connections. Table 8-31 FE/GE optical cable connections Cable Number T1 Cable Description See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

8.2.6 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor LTE Only Base Station
In an LTE only base station, the E1/T1 cable or FE/GE optical cable can be used for data transmission.

Transmission over the E1/T1 Cable


When the E1/T1 cable is used for data transmission, the UTRP is required. Figure 8-32 shows the transmission cable connections. Figure 8-32 E1/T1 cable connections

Table 8-32 describes the cable connections. Table 8-32 E1/T1 cable connections Cable Number T1 and T2 Cable Description See9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

Transmission over the FE Cable


When an LTE only base station uses FE/GE transmission, the FE/GE optical cable is usually used for data transmission. Figure 8-33 shows the transmission cable connections. Figure 8-33 FE/GE optical cable connections

Table 8-33 describes the cable connections.


8-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 8-33 FE/GE optical cable connections Cable Number T1 Cable Description See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

8.2.7 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode
When a GSM+UMTS base station works in co-transmission mode, TDM co-transmission or IP co-transmission can be used.

TDM Co-Transmission
Figure 8-34 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM co-transmission mode when the GTMU E1/T1 port is used as the shared port for data transmission, and the backplane-based communication is adopted by the GTMU and the WMPT to implement TDM co-transmission. Figure 8-34 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTS base station (1)

Table 8-34 describes the cable connections. Table 8-34 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTS base station (1) Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

Figure 8-35 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM co-transmission mode when the E1/T1 port of the GSM UTRP is used as the shared port for data transmission, and the backplane-based communication is adopted by the GSM UTRP and the WMPT to implement TDM co-transmission.
NOTE

Note that in this scenario, the E1/T1 ports of the GTMU and the WMPT are also used for data transmission, but the corresponding cable connection is not shown here.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-25

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 8-35 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTS base station (2)

Table 8-35 describes the cable connections. Table 8-35 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTS base station (2) Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

IP Co-Transmission
Figure 8-36 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP cotransmission mode when the WMPT E1/T1 port is used as the shared port for data transmission, and the FE/GE electrical ports of the GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected to implement IP co-transmission.
NOTE

IP co-transmission can also be implemented by interconnecting the FE/GE optical ports of the GTMU and the WMPT, whose transmission cable connection is similar to Figure 8-36. Therefore, the transmission cable connection that interconnects the FE/GE optical ports of the GTMU and the WMPT to implement IP cotransmission is not shown here.

Figure 8-36 E1/T1 cable connections in IP co-transmission mode

Table 8-36 describes the cable connections. Table 8-36 E1/T1 cable connections in IP co-transmission mode Cable Number T1 Cable Description See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

8-26

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Cable Number T2 T3

Cable Description See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

Figure 8-37 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP cotransmission mode when the WMPT FE/GE electrical port is used as the shared port for data transmission, and the FE/GE optical ports of the GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected to implement IP co-transmission. Figure 8-37 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections in IP co-transmission mode

Table 8-37 describes the cable connections. Table 8-37 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections in IP co-transmission mode Cable Number T1 T2 T3 Cable Description See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports. See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-38 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP cotransmission mode when the WMPT FE/GE optical port is used as the shared port for data transmission, and the FE/GE electrical ports of the GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected to implement IP co-transmission. Figure 8-38 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (1)

Table 8-38 describes the cable connections.


Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-27

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Table 8-38 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (1) Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports. See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Figure 8-39 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP cotransmission mode when the FE/GE optical port of the UMTS UTRP2 is used as the shared ports for data transmission, and the FE/GE optical ports of the GTMU and the UMTS UTRP2 are interconnected to implement IP co-transmission. Figure 8-39 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (2)

Table 8-39 describes the cable connections. Table 8-39 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (2) Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports. See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

8.2.8 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode
When a GSM+UMTS base station works in co-transmission mode, TDM co-transmission or IP co-transmission can be used.

TDM Co-Transmission
Figure 8-40 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM co-transmission mode when the GTMU E1/T1 port is used as the shared port for data transmission, and the backplane-based communication is adopted by the GTMU and the WMPT to implement TDM co-transmission. Figure 8-40 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTS base station (1)

8-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 8-40 describes the cable connections. Table 8-40 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTS base station (1) Cable Number T1 Cable Description See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

Figure 8-41 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM co-transmission mode when the E1/T1 port of the GSM UTRP is used as the shared port for data transmission, and the backplane-based communication is adopted by the GSM UTRP and the WMPT to implement TDM co-transmission.
NOTE

Note that in this scenario, the E1/T1 ports of the GTMU and the WMPT are also used for data transmission, but the corresponding cable connection is not shown here.

Figure 8-41 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTS base station (2)

Table 8-41 describes the cable connections. Table 8-41 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTS base station (2) Cable Number T1 Cable Description See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

IP Co-Transmission
Figure 8-42 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP cotransmission mode when the WMPT E1/T1 port is used as the shared port for data transmission, and the FE/GE electrical ports of the GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected to implement IP co-transmission.
NOTE

IP co-transmission can also be implemented by interconnecting the FE/GE optical ports of the GTMU and the WMPT, whose transmission cable connection is similar to Figure 8-42. Therefore, the transmission cable connection that interconnects the FE/GE optical ports of the GTMU and the WMPT to implement IP cotransmission is not shown here.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-29

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 8-42 E1/T1 cable connections in IP co-transmission mode

Table 8-42 describes the cable connections. Table 8-42 E1/T1 cable connections in IP co-transmission mode Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable. See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports.

Figure 8-43 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP cotransmission mode when the WMPT FE/GE electrical port is used as the shared port for data transmission, and the FE/GE optical ports of the GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected to implement IP co-transmission. Figure 8-43 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections in IP co-transmission mode

Table 8-43 describes the cable connections. Table 8-43 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections in IP co-transmission mode Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 9.7 FE/GE Cable. See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.

Figure 8-44 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP cotransmission mode when the WMPT FE/GE optical port is used as the shared port for data transmission, and the FE/GE electrical ports of the GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected to implement IP co-transmission. Figure 8-44 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (1)

8-30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 8-44 describes the cable connections. Table 8-44 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (1) Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports. See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Figure 8-45 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP cotransmission mode when the FE/GE optical port of the UMTS UTRP2 is used as the shared ports for data transmission, and the FE/GE optical ports of the GTMU and the UMTS UTRP2 are interconnected to implement IP co-transmission. Figure 8-45 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (2)

Table 8-45 describes the cable connections. Table 8-45 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (2) Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports. See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

8.2.9 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode
When a GSM+UMTS base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transmission links can be configured for the GSM side and UMTS side. This section describes only two typical manners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.

GSM E1/T1+UMTS E1/T1


Figure 8-46 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cables are used for data transmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station works in separate transmission mode.
Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-31

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 8-46 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM E1/T1+UMTS E1/T1 mode

Table 8-46 describes the cable connections. Table 8-46 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM E1/T1+UMTS E1/T1 mode Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4 Cable Description See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GE


Figure 8-47 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE Ethernet cables are used for data transmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station works in separate transmission mode. Figure 8-47 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GE mode (1)

Table 8-47 describes the cable connections. Table 8-47 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GE mode (1) Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4 Cable Description See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

8-32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 8-48 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE optical cables are used for data transmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station works in separate transmission mode. Figure 8-48 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GE mode (2)

Table 8-48 describes the cable connections. Table 8-48 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GE mode (2) Cable Number T1 and T2 Cable Description See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

8.2.10 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode
When a GSM+UMTS base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transmission links can be configured for the GSM side and UMTS side. This section describes only two typical manners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.

GSM E1/T1+UMTS E1/T1


Figure 8-49 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cables are used for data transmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station works in separate transmission mode. Figure 8-49 E1/T1 cable connections in separate transmission mode

Table 8-49 describes the cable connections. Table 8-49 E1/T1 cable connections in separate transmission mode Cable Number T1 and T2 Cable Description See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-33

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GE


Figure 8-50 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE Ethernet cables are used for data transmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station works in separate transmission mode. Figure 8-50 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (1)

Table 8-50 describes the cable connections. Table 8-50 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (1) Cable Number T1 and T2 Cable Description See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-51 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE optical cables are used for data transmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station works in separate transmission mode. Figure 8-51 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (2)

Table 8-51 describes the cable connections. Table 8-51 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (2) Cable Number T1 and T2 Cable Description See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

8.2.11 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM +UMTS Base Station in Route Backup Transmission Mode
A GSM+UMTS base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnection between the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the GTMU and WMPT panels. Based on the co-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the GTMU and WMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used for interconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the BSC and RNC.
8-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

In a GSM+UMTS base station, the route backup transmission mode has the following characteristics: l l l l IP transmission is applied. The GTMU and WMPT are connected to the BSC or RNC through the primary channel respectively. The GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected through FE ports on their panels. If the primary channel is faulty, the secondary channel takes over. After the primary channel is restored, the route is switched back to the primary one. The bandwidth required by UMTS services is larger than the processing capability of the GSM standard transport network. Therefore, when the secondary channel is used, the Quality of Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.

In a GSM+UMTS base station, the following limitations on the route backup transmission mode apply: l l l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1 transmission. The route backup transmission mode is not applicable on the ports on the UTRPs for GSM and UMTS transmission. It is applicable only on the ports on the GTMU and WMPT panels. In route backup transmission mode, the FE ports of one type on the GTMU and WMPT panels are interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connected to the BSC and the RNC.

FE Optical Ports for Interconnection and FE Electrical Ports Connected to the Transport Network
Figure 8-52 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in route backup transmission mode when the FE optical ports on the GTMU and WMPT are interconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the BSC and RNC. Figure 8-52 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the transport network

Table 8-52 describes the cable connections. Table 8-52 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the transport network Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4
Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Cable Description See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-35

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Cable Number T5

Cable Description See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.

FE Electrical Ports for Interconnection and FE Optical Ports Connected to the Transport Network
Figure 8-53 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in route backup transmission mode when the FE electrical ports on the GTMU and WMPT are interconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to the BSC and RNC. Figure 8-53 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the transport network

Table 8-53 describes the cable connections. Table 8-53 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the transport network Cable Number T1 and T2 T3 Cable Description See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable. See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports.

8.2.12 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Route Backup Transmission Mode
A GSM+UMTS base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnection between the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the GTMU and WMPT panels. Based on the co-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the GTMU and WMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used for interconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the BSC and RNC. In a GSM+UMTS base station, the route backup transmission mode has the following characteristics: l l
8-36

IP transmission is applied. The GTMU and WMPT are connected to the BSC or RNC through the primary channel respectively. The GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected through FE ports on their panels.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

l l

If the primary channel is faulty, the secondary channel takes over. After the primary channel is restored, the route is switched back to the primary one. The bandwidth required by UMTS services is larger than the processing capability of the GSM standard transport network. Therefore, when the secondary channel is used, the Quality of Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.

In a GSM+UMTS base station, the following limitations on the route backup transmission mode apply: l l l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1 transmission. The route backup transmission mode is not applicable on the ports on the UTRPs for GSM and UMTS transmission. It is applicable only on the ports on the GTMU and WMPT panels. In route backup transmission mode, the FE ports of one type on the GTMU and WMPT panels are interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connected to the BSC and the RNC.

FE Optical Ports for Interconnection and FE Electrical Ports Connected to the Transport Network
Figure 8-54 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in route backup transmission mode when the FE optical ports on the GTMU and WMPT are interconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the BSC and RNC. Figure 8-54 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the transport network

Table 8-54 describes the cable connections. Table 8-54 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the transport network Cable Number T1 and T2 T3 Cable Description See 9.7 FE/GE Cable. See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-37

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

FE Electrical Ports for Interconnection and FE Optical Ports Connected to the Transport Network
Figure 8-55 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in route backup transmission mode when the FE electrical ports on the GTMU and WMPT are interconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to the BSC and RNC. Figure 8-55 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the transport network

Table 8-55 describes the cable connections. Table 8-55 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the transport network Cable Number T1 and T2 T3 Cable Description See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable. See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports.

8.2.13 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode
In a GSM+LTE base station, IP co-transmission can be implemented by interconnecting the FE ports on the GTMU panel and the LMPT panel and using the FE/GE port on the LMPT or the E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP as the shared port for data transmission.

Shared FE/GE Port on the LMPT for Data Transmission


Figure 8-56 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the GTMU. Figure 8-56 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT for data transmission

8-38

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 8-56 describes the cable connections. Table 8-56 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT for data transmission Cable Number T1 T2 T3 Cable Description See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports. See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-57 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the GTMU. Figure 8-57 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPT for data transmission

Table 8-57 describes the cable connections. Table 8-57 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPT for data transmission Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports. See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Shared E1/T1 Port on the LTE UTRP for Data Transmission


Figure 8-58 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the GTMU. Figure 8-58 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (1)

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-39

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Table 8-58 describes the cable connections. Table 8-58 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (1) Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4 T5 Cable Description See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable. See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.

Figure 8-59 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the GTMU. Figure 8-59 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (2)

Table 8-59 describes the cable connections. Table 8-59 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (2) Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4 T5 Cable Description See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable. See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports.

8-40

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

8.2.14 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode
In a GSM+LTE base station, IP co-transmission can be implemented by interconnecting the FE ports on the GTMU panel and the LMPT panel and using the FE/GE port on the LMPT or the E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP as the shared port for data transmission.

Shared FE/GE Port on the LMPT for Data Transmission


Figure 8-60 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the GTMU. Figure 8-60 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT for data transmission

Table 8-60 describes the cable connections. Table 8-60 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT for data transmission Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 9.7 FE/GE Cable. See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.

Figure 8-61 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the GTMU. Figure 8-61 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPT for data transmission

Table 8-61 describes the cable connections.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-41

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Table 8-61 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPT for data transmission Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports. See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Shared E1/T1 Port on the LTE UTRP for Data Transmission


Figure 8-62 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the GTMU. Figure 8-62 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (1)

Table 8-62 describes the cable connections. Table 8-62 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (1) Cable Number T1 and T2 T3 Cable Description See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable. See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.

Figure 8-63 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the GTMU. Figure 8-63 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (2)

8-42

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 8-63 describes the cable connections. Table 8-63 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (2) Cable Number T1 and T2 T3 Cable Description See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable. See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports.

8.2.15 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode
When a GSM+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport links can be configured for the GSM side and LTE side. This section describes two typical manners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.

GSM E1/T1+LTE FE/GE


Figure 8-64 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU is used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 8-64 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)

Table 8-64 describes the cable connections. Table 8-64 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1) Cable Number T1 T2 T3 Cable Description See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable. See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-43

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Cable Number T4

Cable Description See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-65 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU is used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 8-65 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)

Table 8-65 describes the cable connections. Table 8-65 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2) Cable Number T1 T2 T3 Cable Description See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable. See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Figure 8-66 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU and the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the UTRP are used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 8-66 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)

Table 8-66 describes the cable connections.


8-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 8-66 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1) Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4 T5 T6 Cable Description See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable. See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-67 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU and the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the UTRP are used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 8-67 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)

Table 8-67 describes the cable connections. Table 8-67 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2) Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4 T5 Cable Description See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable. See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE


Figure 8-68 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in separate transmission mode when the FE/GE electrical ports are used for data transmission on both the GSM and LTE sides.
Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-45

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 8-68 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1)

Table 8-68 describes the cable connections. Table 8-68 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1) Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4 Cable Description See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-69 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 8-69 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2)

Table 8-69 describes the cable connections. Table 8-69 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2) Cable Number T1 T2 T3 Cable Description See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.7 FE/GE Cable. See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

8-46

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

8.2.16 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode
When a GSM+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport links can be configured for the GSM side and LTE side. This section describes two typical manners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.

GSM E1/T1+LTE FE/GE


Figure 8-70 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU is used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 8-70 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)

Table 8-70 describes the cable connections. Table 8-70 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1) Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable. See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-71 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU is used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 8-71 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)

Table 8-71 describes the cable connections.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-47

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Table 8-71 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2) Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable. See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Figure 8-72 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU and the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the UTRP are used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 8-72 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)

Table 8-72 describes the cable connections. Table 8-72 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1) Cable Number T1 and T2 T3 Cable Description See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable. See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-73 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU and the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the UTRP are used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 8-73 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)

8-48

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 8-73 describes the cable connections. Table 8-73 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2) Cable Number T1 and T2 T3 Cable Description See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable. See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE


Figure 8-74 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in separate transmission mode when the FE/GE electrical ports are used for data transmission on both the GSM and LTE sides. Figure 8-74 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1)

Table 8-74 describes the cable connections. Table 8-74 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1) Cable Number T1 and T2 Cable Description See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-75 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 8-75 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2)

Table 8-75 describes the cable connections.


Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-49

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Table 8-75 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2) Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 9.7 FE/GE Cable. See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

8.2.17 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Route Backup Transmission Mode
A GSM+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnection between the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the GTMU and LMPT panels. Based on the cotransmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the GTMU and LMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used for interconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the transport network. In a GSM+LTE base station, the route backup transmission mode has the following characteristics: l l l l IP transmission is applied. The GTMU and LMPT are connected to the transport network through the primary channel. The GTMU and the LMPT are interconnected through FE ports on their panels. If the primary channel is faulty, the secondary channel takes over. After the primary channel is restored, the route is switched back to the primary one. The bandwidth required by LTE services is larger than the processing capability of the GSM standard transport network. Therefore, when the secondary channel is used, the Quality of Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.

In a GSM+LTE base station, the following limitations on the route backup transmission mode apply: l l l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1 transmission. The route backup transmission mode is not applicable on the ports on the UTRPs for GSM and LTE transmission. It is applicable only on the ports on the GTMU and LMPT panels. In route backup transmission mode, the FE ports of one type on the GTMU and LMPT panels are interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connected to the transport network.

FE Optical Ports for Interconnection and FE Electrical Ports Connected to the Transport Network
Figure 8-76 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in route backup transmission mode when the FE optical ports on the GTMU and LMPT are interconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the transport network.

8-50

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 8-76 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the transport network

Table 8-76 describes the cable connections. Table 8-76 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the transport network Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4 T5 Cable Description See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.7 FE/GE Cable. See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.

FE Electrical Ports for Interconnection and FE Optical Ports Connected to the Transport Network
Figure 8-77 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in route backup transmission mode when the FE electrical ports on the GTMU and LMPT are interconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to the transport network. Figure 8-77 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the transport network

Table 8-77 describes the cable connections. Table 8-77 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the transport network Cable Number T1 and T2 Cable Description See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-51

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Cable Number T3

Cable Description See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports.

8.2.18 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Route Backup Transmission Mode
A GSM+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnection between the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the GTMU and LMPT panels. Based on the cotransmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the GTMU and LMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used for interconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the transport network. In a GSM+LTE base station, the route backup transmission mode has the following characteristics: l l l l IP transmission is applied. The GTMU and LMPT are connected to the transport network through the primary channel. The GTMU and the LMPT are interconnected through FE ports on their panels. If the primary channel is faulty, the secondary channel takes over. After the primary channel is restored, the route is switched back to the primary one. The bandwidth required by LTE services is larger than the processing capability of the GSM standard transport network. Therefore, when the secondary channel is used, the Quality of Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.

In a GSM+LTE base station, the following limitations on the route backup transmission mode apply: l l l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1 transmission. The route backup transmission mode is not applicable on the ports on the UTRPs for GSM and LTE transmission. It is applicable only on the ports on the GTMU and LMPT panels. In route backup transmission mode, the FE ports of one type on the GTMU and LMPT panels are interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connected to the transport network.

FE Optical Ports for Interconnection and FE Electrical Ports Connected to the Transport Network
Figure 8-78 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in route backup transmission mode when the FE optical ports on the GTMU and LMPT are interconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the transport network. Figure 8-78 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the transport network

8-52

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 8-78 describes the cable connections. Table 8-78 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the transport network Cable Number T1 and T2 T3 Cable Description See 9.7 FE/GE Cable. See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.

FE Electrical Ports for Interconnection and FE Optical Ports Connected to the Transport Network
Figure 8-79 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in route backup transmission mode when the FE electrical ports on the GTMU and LMPT are interconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to the transport network. Figure 8-79 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the transport network

Table 8-79 describes the cable connections. Table 8-79 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the transport network Cable Number T1 and T2 T3 Cable Description See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable. See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports.

8.2.19 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode
In a UMTS+LTE base station, IP co-transmission can be implemented by interconnecting the FE ports on the WMPT panel and the LMPT panel and using the FE/GE port on the LMPT or the E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP as the shared port for data transmission.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-53

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Shared FE/GE Port on the LMPT for Data Transmission


Figure 8-80 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the WMPT. Figure 8-80 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT for data transmission

Table 8-80 describes the cable connections. Table 8-80 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT for data transmission Cable Number T1 T2 T3 Cable Description See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports. See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-81 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT. Figure 8-81 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPT for data transmission

Table 8-81 describes the cable connections. Table 8-81 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPT for data transmission Cable Number T1 Cable Description See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

8-54

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Cable Number T2

Cable Description See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Shared E1/T1 Port on the LTE UTRP for Data Transmission


Figure 8-82 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the WMPT. Figure 8-82 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (1)

Table 8-82 describes the cable connections. Table 8-82 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (1) Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4 T5 Cable Description See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable. See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.

Figure 8-83 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT. Figure 8-83 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (2)

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-55

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Table 8-83 describes the cable connections. Table 8-83 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (2) Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4 T5 Cable Description See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable. See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports.

8.2.20 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode
In a UMTS+LTE base station, IP co-transmission can be implemented by interconnecting the FE ports on the WMPT panel and the LMPT panel and using the FE/GE port on the LMPT or the E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP as the shared port for data transmission.

Shared FE/GE Port on the LMPT for Data Transmission


Figure 8-84 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the WMPT. Figure 8-84 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT for data transmission

Table 8-84 describes the cable connections. Table 8-84 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT for data transmission Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 9.7 FE/GE Cable. See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.

8-56

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 8-85 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT. Figure 8-85 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPT for data transmission

Table 8-85 describes the cable connections. Table 8-85 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPT for data transmission Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports. See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Shared E1/T1 Port on the LTE UTRP for Data Transmission


Figure 8-86 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE optical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the WMPT. Figure 8-86 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (1)

Table 8-86 describes the cable connections. Table 8-86 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (1) Cable Number T1 and T2 T3 Cable Description See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable. See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-57

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 8-87 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT. Figure 8-87 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (2)

Table 8-87 describes the cable connections. Table 8-87 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission (2) Cable Number T1 and T2 T3 Cable Description See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable. See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports.

8.2.21 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode
When a UMTS+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport links can be configured for the UMTS side and the LTE side. This section describes two typical manners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.

UMTS E1/T1+LTE FE/GE


Figure 8-88 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the WMPT is used for data transmission on the UMTS side and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 8-88 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)

8-58

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 8-88 describes the cable connections. Table 8-88 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1) Cable Number T1 T2 T3 T4 Cable Description See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable. See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-89 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the WMPT is used for data transmission on the UMTS side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 8-89 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)

Table 8-89 describes the cable connections. Table 8-89 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2) Cable Number T1 T2 T3 Cable Description See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable. See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Figure 8-90 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing eight E1s/T1s) on the UTRP3 or UTRP4 is used for data transmission on the UMTS side and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-59

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 8-90 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)

Table 8-90 describes the cable connections. Table 8-90 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1) Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4 T5 T6 Cable Description See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable. See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-91 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing eight E1s/T1s) on the UTRP3 or UTRP4 is used for data transmission on the UMTS side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 8-91 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)

Table 8-91 describes the cable connections. Table 8-91 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2) Cable Number T1 and T3 Cable Description See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

8-60

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Cable Number T2 and T4 T5

Cable Description See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable. See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE


Figure 8-92 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in separate transmission mode when the FE/GE ports are used for data transmission on both the UMTS and LTE sides. Figure 8-92 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1)

Table 8-92 describes the cable connections. Table 8-92 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1) Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4 Cable Description See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-93 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the UMTS side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 8-93 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2)

Table 8-93 describes the cable connections.


Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-61

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Table 8-93 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2) Cable Number T1 T2 T3 Cable Description See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.7 FE/GE Cable. See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

8.2.22 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode
When a UMTS+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport links can be configured for the UMTS side and the LTE side. This section describes two typical manners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.

UMTS E1/T1+LTE FE/GE


Figure 8-94 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the WMPT is used for data transmission on the UMTS side and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 8-94 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)

Table 8-94 describes the cable connections. Table 8-94 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1) Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 9.7 FE/GE Cable. See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

Figure 8-95 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the WMPT is used for data transmission on the UMTS side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.
8-62 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 8-95 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)

Table 8-95 describes the cable connections. Table 8-95 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2) Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable. See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

Figure 8-96 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing eight E1s/T1s) on the UTRP3 or UTRP4 is used for data transmission on the UMTS side and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side. Figure 8-96 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)

Table 8-96 describes the cable connections. Table 8-96 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1) Cable Number T1 and T2 T3 Cable Description See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable. See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-97 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the E1/T1 port (providing eight E1s/T1s) on the UTRP3 or UTRP4 is used for data transmission on the UMTS side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.
Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-63

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 8-97 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)

Table 8-97 describes the cable connections. Table 8-97 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2) Cable Number T1 and T2 T3 Cable Description See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable. See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE


Figure 8-98 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in separate transmission mode when the FE/GE ports are used for data transmission on both the UMTS and LTE sides. Figure 8-98 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1)

Table 8-98 describes the cable connections. Table 8-98 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1) Cable Number T1 and T2 Cable Description See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-99 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the UMTS side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.
8-64 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 8-99 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2)

Table 8-99 describes the cable connections. Table 8-99 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2) Cable Number T1 T2 Cable Description See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable. See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

8.2.23 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Route Backup Transmission Mode
A UMTS+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnection between the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the WMPT and LMPT panels. Based on the co-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the WMPT and LMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used for interconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the transport network. In a UMTS+LTE base station, the route backup transmission mode has the following characteristics: l l l l IP transmission is applied. The WMPT and LMPT are connected to the transport network through the primary channel. The WMPT and the LMPT are interconnected through FE ports on their panels. If the primary channel is faulty, the secondary channel takes over. After the primary channel is restored, the route is switched back to the primary one. The bandwidth required by LTE services is larger than the processing capability of the UMTS standard transport network. Therefore, when the secondary channel is used, the Quality of Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.

In a UMTS+LTE base station, the following limitations on the route backup transmission mode apply: l l l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1 transmission. The route backup transmission mode is not applicable on the ports on the UTRPs for UMTS and LTE transmission. It is applicable only on the ports on the WMPT and LMPT panels. In route backup transmission mode, the FE ports of one type on the WMPT and LMPT panels are interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connected to the transport network.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-65

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

FE Optical Ports for Interconnection and FE Electrical Ports Connected to the Transport Network
Figure 8-100 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup transmission mode when the FE optical ports on the WMPT and LMPT are interconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the transport network. Figure 8-100 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the transport network

Table 8-100 describes the cable connections. Table 8-100 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the transport network Cable Number T1 and T3 T2 and T4 T5 Cable Description See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.7 FE/GE Cable. See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.

FE Electrical Ports for Interconnection and FE Optical Ports Connected to the Transport Network
Figure 8-101 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup transmission mode when the FE electrical ports on the WMPT and LMPT are interconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to the transport network. Figure 8-101 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the transport network

Table 8-101 describes the cable connections.


8-66 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Table 8-101 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the transport network Cable Number T1 and T2 T3 Cable Description See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable. See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports.

8.2.24 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Route Backup Transmission Mode
A UMTS+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnection between the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the WMPT and LMPT panels. Based on the co-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the WMPT and LMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used for interconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the transport network. In a UMTS+LTE base station, the route backup transmission mode has the following characteristics: l l l l IP transmission is applied. The WMPT and LMPT are connected to the transport network through the primary channel. The WMPT and the LMPT are interconnected through FE ports on their panels. If the primary channel is faulty, the secondary channel takes over. After the primary channel is restored, the route is switched back to the primary one. The bandwidth required by LTE services is larger than the processing capability of the UMTS standard transport network. Therefore, when the secondary channel is used, the Quality of Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.

In a UMTS+LTE base station, the following limitations on the route backup transmission mode apply: l l l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1 transmission. The route backup transmission mode is not applicable on the ports on the UTRPs for UMTS and LTE transmission. It is applicable only on the ports on the WMPT and LMPT panels. In route backup transmission mode, the FE ports of one type on the WMPT and LMPT panels are interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connected to the transport network.

FE Optical Ports for Interconnection and FE Electrical Ports Connected to the Transport Network
Figure 8-102 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup transmission mode when the FE optical ports on the WMPT and LMPT are interconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the transport network.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-67

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 8-102 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the transport network

Table 8-102 describes the cable connections. Table 8-102 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to the transport network Cable Number T1 and T2 T3 Cable Description See 9.7 FE/GE Cable. See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.

FE Electrical Ports for Interconnection and FE Optical Ports Connected to the Transport Network
Figure 8-103 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup transmission mode when the FE electrical ports on the WMPT and LMPT are interconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to the transport network. Figure 8-103 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the transport network

Table 8-103 describes the cable connections. Table 8-103 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to the transport network Cable Number T1 and T2 T3 Cable Description See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable. See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports.

8-68

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

8.2.25 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Hybrid Transmission Mode
A UMTS+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnection between the FE ports on the WMPT and LMPT panels. Based on the co-transmission, hybrid transmission can be implemented. That is, the UMTS E1/T1 port and LTE FE/GE port are used as shared ports for data transmission. The E1/T1 port is used to transmit the services with high QoS requirements, such as CS services. The FE/GE port is used to transmit the services with low QoS requirements, such as PS services. The UMTS E1/T1 port and the LTE FE/GE port are used for data transmission in a UMTS+LTE base station in hybrid transmission. When the UMTS FE/GE port and the LTE FE/GE port are used for data transmission, hybrid transmission is not applicable.

UMTS E1/T1 Port and LTE FE/GE Electrical Port for Data Transmission
Figure 8-104 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in hybrid transmission mode when the UMTS E1/T1 port and the LTE FE/GE electrical port are used for data transmission. Figure 8-104 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE electrical port)

Table 8-104 describes the cable connections. Table 8-104 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE electrical port) Cable Number T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 Cable Description See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable. See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.7 FE/GE Cable. See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-69

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

UMTS E1/T1 Port and LTE FE/GE Optical Port for Data Transmission
Figure 8-105 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in hybrid transmission mode when the UMTS E1/T1 port and the LTE FE/GE optical port are used for data transmission. Figure 8-105 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE optical port)

Table 8-105 describes the cable connections. Table 8-105 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE optical port) Cable Number T1 T2 T3 T4 Cable Description See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable. See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable. See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports. See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

8.2.26 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Hybrid Transmission Mode
A UMTS+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnection between the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the WMPT and LMPT panels. Based on the co-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the WMPT and LMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used for interconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the transport network. The UMTS E1/T1 port and the LTE FE/GE port are used for data transmission in a UMTS+LTE base station in hybrid transmission. When the UMTS FE/GE port and the LTE FE/GE port are used for data transmission, hybrid transmission is not applicable.

UMTS E1/T1 Port and LTE FE/GE Electrical Port for Data Transmission
Figure 8-106 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in hybrid transmission mode when the UMTS E1/T1 port and the LTE FE/GE electrical port are used for data transmission.
8-70 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 8-106 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE electrical port)

Table 8-106 describes the cable connections. Table 8-106 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE electrical port) Cable Number T1 T2 T3 Cable Description See 9.7 FE/GE Cable. See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable. See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.

UMTS E1/T1 Port and LTE FE/GE Optical Port for Data Transmission
Figure 8-107 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in hybrid transmission mode when the UMTS E1/T1 port and the LTE FE/GE optical port are used for data transmission. Figure 8-107 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE optical port)

Table 8-107 describes the cable connections. Table 8-107 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE optical port) Cable Number T1 T2 T3 Cable Description See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable. See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable. See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-71

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8.3 CPRI Cable Connections


The CPRI cable connections in the DBS3900 vary according to the working modes of the DBS3900. 8.3.1 CPRI Cable Connection in the UMTS Only Base Station When the DBS3900 works in UMTS mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cable connections can be used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands. 8.3.2 CPRI Cable Connection in the GSM Only Base Station When the DBS3900 works in GSM mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cable connections can be used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands. 8.3.3 CPRI Cable Connections in the GSM+UMTS Base Station When the DBS3900 works in GSM+UMTS mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cable connections can be used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands. 8.3.4 CPRI Cable Connection in the LO Base Station When the DBS3900 works in LTE mode, CPRI cable connections vary depending on the sector and frequency band. 8.3.5 CPRI Cable Connections in the GL Base Station When the DBS3900 works in GL mode, CPRI cable connections vary depending on the sector and frequency band. 8.3.6 CPRI Cable Connections in the a UL Base Station When the DBS3900 works in UL mode, CPRI cable connections vary depending on the sector and frequency band.

8.3.1 CPRI Cable Connection in the UMTS Only Base Station


When the DBS3900 works in UMTS mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cable connections can be used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands. Figure 8-108 shows the CPRI cable connections when the BBU is configured with the WBBPb, the RRU3804 works in single-band mode and supports not more than three sectors, and the MIMO is supported. Figure 8-108 CPRI cable connections (1)

8-72

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 8-109 shows the CPRI cable connections when the BBU is configured with the WBBPb, the RRU3804 works in single-band mode and supports not more than three sectors, the MIMO is supported or bandwidth and carriers are expanded, and two RRU3804s work in the same sector are cascaded. Figure 8-109 CPRI cable connections (2)

Figure 8-110 shows the CPRI cable connections when the BBU is configured with the WBBPd, the RRU3804 works in single-band mode and supports not more than three sectors, the MIMO is supported or bandwidth and carriers are expanded, and two RRU3804s work in the same sector are cascaded. Figure 8-110 CPRI cable connections (3)

8.3.2 CPRI Cable Connection in the GSM Only Base Station


When the DBS3900 works in GSM mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cable connections can be used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands.
Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8-73

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

When the RRU3008/RRU3004 works in dual-band mode, six RRUs correspond to three sectors. In this case, a pair of two RRUs working in the same sector with different bands is cascaded. Figure 8-111 shows the CPRI cable connections. Figure 8-111 CPRI cable connections (1)

When the RRU3008/RRU3004 works in dual-band mode, nine RRUs correspond to three sectors. In this case, a group of three RRUs working in the same sector with different bands is cascaded. Figure 8-112 shows the CPRI cable connections. Figure 8-112 CPRI cable connections (2)

8.3.3 CPRI Cable Connections in the GSM+UMTS Base Station


When the DBS3900 works in GSM+UMTS mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cable connections can be used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands. Figure 8-113 shows the CPRI cable connections when the RRU3908 works in single-band mode and three RRU3908s working in dual-star topology correspond to three sectors.

8-74

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 8-113 CPRI cable connections (1)

When the RRU3804 works in single-band mode, an RRU3804 working in star topology corresponds to a sector, or when the RRU3008/RRU3004 works in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in star and chain topology correspond to a sector, and a pair of two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in the same sector with different bands is cascaded, the CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 8-114. Figure 8-114 CPRI cable connections (2)

When the RRU3804 works in dual-band mode, two RRU3804s correspond to a sector, and a pair of two RRU3804s working in the same sector with different bands is cascaded, or when the RRU3008/RRU3004 works in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in star and chain topology correspond to a sector, and a pair of two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in the same sector with different bands is cascaded, the CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 8-115.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-75

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 8-115 CPRI cable connections (3)

When the RRU3908 works in single-band mode, three RRU3908s working in dual-star topology correspond to three sectors, or when the RRU3008/RRU3004 works in single-band mode, and three RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in star topology correspond to three sectors, the CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 8-116. Figure 8-116 CPRI cable connections (4)

8.3.4 CPRI Cable Connection in the LO Base Station


When the DBS3900 works in LTE mode, CPRI cable connections vary depending on the sector and frequency band.

8-76

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

When the RRU works in single-band mode, it serves not more than three sectors, uses 10 MHz or 20 MHz bandwidth, and supports 2T2R MIMO. The CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 8-117. Figure 8-117 CPRI cable connections (1)

When the RRU works in single-band mode, it serves not more than three sectors, uses 10 MHz bandwidth, and supports 4T4R MIMO. The CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 8-118. Figure 8-118 CPRI cable connections (2)

When the RRU works in single-band mode, it serves not more than three sectors, uses 20 MHz bandwidth, and supports 4T4R MIMO. The CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 8-119.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-77

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 8-119 CPRI cable connections (3)

8.3.5 CPRI Cable Connections in the GL Base Station


When the DBS3900 works in GL mode, CPRI cable connections vary depending on the sector and frequency band. When the RRU3201 works in single-band mode, it working in CPRI star topology serves three sectors and supports 2T2R MIMO. When the RRU3008 works in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s working in CPRI star topology correspond to one sector, and a pair of two RRU3008s working in the same sector with different bands are connected in cascading mode. The CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 8-120. Figure 8-120 CPRI cable connections (1)

When the RRU3201 works in dual-band mode, it working in CPRI star topology serves three sectors, uses 20 MHz or 15 MHz bandwidth, and supports 2T2R MIMO. When the RRU3008 works in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s working in CPRI star topology serve one sector, and a pair of two RRU3008s working in the same sector with different bands are connected in cascading mode. The CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 8-121.

8-78

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 8-121 CPRI cable connections (2)

When the RRU3201 works in single-band mode, it serves three sectors, uses 10 MHz bandwidth, supports 4T4R MIMO, and the RRUs in a sector use the dual-star topology. When the RRU3008 works in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s working in CPRI star topology serve one sector, and a pair of two RRU3008s working in the same sector with different bands are connected in cascading mode. The CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 8-122. Figure 8-122 CPRI cable connections (3)

When the RRU3908 works in single-band mode, three RRU3908s serve three sectors, and the RRUs working in the same sector use the dual-star topology. When the RRU3008 works in single-band mode, three RRU3008s working in star topology serve three sectors. The CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 8-123. Figure 8-123 CPRI cable connections (4)

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-79

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8.3.6 CPRI Cable Connections in the a UL Base Station


When the DBS3900 works in UL mode, CPRI cable connections vary depending on the sector and frequency band. When the RRU3201 works in single-band mode, it working in CPRI star topology serves three sectors and supports 2T2R MIMO. When the RRU3804 works in single-band mode, it working in CPRI star topology serves three sectors and does not support MIMO. The CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 8-124. Figure 8-124 CPRI cable connections (1)

When the RRU3201 works in dual-band mode, it working in CPRI star topology serves three sectors, uses 20 MHz or 15 MHz bandwidth, and supports 2T2R MIMO. When the RRU3804 works in single-band mode, a pair of RRUs working in the same sector are connected in cascading mode, and the star topology is used. The CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 8-125. Figure 8-125 CPRI cable connections (2)

8-80

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

When the RRU3201 works in single-band mode, it serves three sectors, uses 10 MHz bandwidth, supports 4T4R MIMO, and the RRUs working in the same sector use the dual-star topology. When the RRU3804 works in single-band mode, it working in star topology corresponds to three sectors, and the RRUs working in the same sector are connected in cascading mode. The CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 8-126. Figure 8-126 CPRI cable connections (3)

8.4 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections


The monitoring signal cable connections are different for the distributed base station in 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supply scenarios.

Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the 110 V AC/220 V AC Power Supply Scenario
Figure 8-127 shows the monitoring signal cable connections of the DBS3900 with the configuration of 1 APM30H+1 TMC+1 BBC in the 110 V/220 V AC power supply scenario.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-81

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 8-127 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30+1 TMC+1 BBC

Table 8-108 describes the monitoring signal cable connections. Table 8-108 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30+1 TMC+1 BBC Cable Number S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 Cable Description Environment Monitoring Signal Cable Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU 9.13 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the APMI and the BBU Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status Sensor Temperature Monitoring Signal Cable for the Batteries Monitoring Signal Cable for the APM30 Transmission Cabinet

Figure 8-128 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 BBC.

8-82

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 8-128 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 BBC

Table 8-109 describes the monitoring signal cable connections. Table 8-109 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 BBC Cable Number S1 S2 S3 and S7 S4 S5 and S6 Cable Description Environment Monitoring Signal Cable Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU 9.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the HEUA and the BBU Temperature Monitoring Signal Cable for the Batteries Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status Sensor

Figure 8-129 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 IBBS200T.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-83

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 8-129 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 IBBS200T

Table 8-110 describes the monitoring signal cable connections. Table 8-110 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 IBBS200T Cable Number S1 S2 S3 and S7 S4 S5 and S6 Cable Description Environment Monitoring Signal Cable Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU 9.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the HEUA and the BBU IBBS200T Monitoring Signal Cable Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status Sensor

Figure 8-130 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T.

8-84

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 8-130 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T

Table 8-111 describes the monitoring signal cable connections. Table 8-111 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T Cable Number S1 S2 and S4 S3 and S5 Cable Description Environment Monitoring Signal Cable Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable 9.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU

Figure 8-131 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in the configuration of 2 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+2 BBC.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-85

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 8-131 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 2 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+2 BBC

Table 8-112 describes the monitoring signal cable connections. Table 8-112 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 2 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+2 BBC Cable Number S1 S2 S3 and S7 S4 S5 and S6 Cable Description Environment Monitoring Signal Cable Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU 9.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the HEUA and the BBU Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status Sensor Temperature Monitoring Signal Cable for the Batteries

Figure 8-132 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in the configuration of 2 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+2 IBBS200T.

8-86

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 8-132 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 2 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+2 IBBS200T

Table 8-113 describes the monitoring signal cable connections. Table 8-113 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 2 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+2 IBBS200T Cable Number S1 S2 S3 and S7 S5 and S6 S4 Cable Description Environment Monitoring Signal Cable Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU 9.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the HEUA and the BBU IBBS200T Monitoring Signal Cable Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status Sensor

Figure 8-133 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+2 IBBS200D/IBBS200T.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-87

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 8-133 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+2 IBBS200D/IBBS200T

Table 8-114 describes the monitoring signal cable connections. Table 8-114 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+2 IBBS200D/IBBS200T Cable Number S1 S2 and S4 S3 and S5 S6 Cable Description Environment Monitoring Signal Cable Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable 9.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU Monitoring Signal Cable Between Cascaded CMUAs

Figure 8-134 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in the configuration of 2 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+4 IBBS200D/IBBS200T.

8-88

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 8-134 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 2 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+4 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
S1 S1 S2 S3 S1 S1 S2 S6

S5

S6 S4

S6 S4

Table 8-115 describes the monitoring signal cable connections. Table 8-115 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 2 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+4 IBBS200D/IBBS200T Cable Number S1 S2 and S4 S3 and S5 S6 Cable Description Environment Monitoring Signal Cable Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable 9.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU Monitoring Signal Cable Between Cascaded CMUAs

Figure 8-135 shows the monitoring signal cable connections of the DBS3900 configured with one OMB in the AC power supply scenario. Figure 8-135 Monitoring cable connections of a base station configured with one OMB in the AC power supply scenario
S2 S2 S1 S4 S1 S2 S3 S5 S5 S3

S4

S2

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-89

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Table 8-116 describes the monitoring signal cable connections. Table 8-116 Monitoring cable connections of a base station configured with one OMB in the AC power supply scenario Cable Number S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 Cable Description Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status Sensor Monitoring Signal Cable for the Fan Monitoring Signal Cable for the HEUA Monitoring Signal Cable for the AC Surge Protection Box Monitoring Signal Cable for the AC/DC Power Equipment

Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario


Figure 8-136 shows the monitoring signal cable connections of the DBS3900 configured with two TMCs in the -48 V DC power supply scenario. Figure 8-136 Monitoring cable connections of a base station configured with two TMCs

Table 8-117 describes the monitoring signal cable connections. Table 8-117 Monitoring cable connections of a base station configured with two TMCs Cable Number S1 and S2 Cable Description 9.13 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the APMI and the BBU

Figure 8-137 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is configured with 2 TMC11Hs (Ver. A).
8-90 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Figure 8-137 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. A)

Table 8-118 describes the monitoring signal cable connections. Table 8-118 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. A) Cable Number S1 and S2 Cable Description 9.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the HEUA and the BBU

Figure 8-138 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is configured with 2 TMC11Hs (Ver. B). Figure 8-138 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. B)

Table 8-119 describes the monitoring signal cable connections.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-91

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Table 8-119 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. B) Cable Number S1 and S2 Cable Description 9.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU

Figure 8-139 shows the monitoring signal cable connections of the DBS3900 configured with one OMB in the DC power supply scenario. Figure 8-139 Monitoring cable connections of a base station configured with one OMB in the DC power supply scenario

Table 8-120 describes the monitoring signal cable connections. Table 8-120 Monitoring cable connections of a base station configured with one OMB in the DC power supply scenario Cable Number S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 Cable Description Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door Status Sensor Monitoring Signal Cable for the Fan Monitoring Signal Cable for the HEUA Monitoring Signal Cable for the AC Surge Protection Box Monitoring Signal Cable for the AC/DC Power Equipment

8-92

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

9 BBU3900 Cables

9
About This Chapter

BBU3900 Cables

This describes the cables of the BBU3900 in terms of their appearance, pin assignment, and installation positions. 9.1 List of BBU3900 Cables This describes the BBU3900 cables. The BBU3900 cables are the PGND cable, BBU power cable, E1/T1 cable, E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable, FE/GE cable, FE/GE surge protection transfer cable, interconnection cable between FE electrical ports, interconnection cable between FE optical ports, CPRI optical cable, monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU, monitoring signal cable between HEUA and BBU, monitoring signal cable for the EMUA, monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC), in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC), BBU alarm cable and GPS clock signal cable. 9.2 PGND Cable The PGND cable ensures the grounding of the BBU. 9.3 BBU Power Cable This section describes the BBU power cable. Either -48 V power cable or +24 V power cable can be used, depending on the power supply scenario. 9.4 BBU Power cable(OMB) The BBU power cable in the OMB is used to supply -48 V DC power to the BBU and HEUA. The DC OMB and AC OMB require different power cables between the BBU and the HEUA. 9.5 E1/T1 Cable The E1/T1 cable connects the BBU to the external transmission device and transmits baseband signals. 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable This section describes the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable connecting the UELP to the transmission board. This cable is optional. 9.7 FE/GE Cable The FE/GE cable connects the BBU to the transmission device through routing devices and transmits baseband signals. 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable
Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-1

9 BBU3900 Cables

BBU3900 Hardware Description

The FE/GE surge protection transfer cable is an optional cable that connects the main control board to the UFLP. 9.9 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports The cable between two FE electrical ports connects the GTMU and the WMPT to implement IP transmission. 9.10 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports The cable between two FE optical ports connects the GTMU and the WMPT to implement IP transmission. 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable The FE/GE optical cable is used to transmit optical signals between the BBU3900 and the transmission device. This cable is optional. 9.12 CPRI Optical Cable The CPRI optical cable transmits CPRI signals between the BBU and the RRU or between RRUs. 9.13 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the APMI and the BBU This describes the monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU. It transmits the environment monitoring signals of the power cabinet to the BBU. 9.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the HEUA and the BBU The monitoring signal cable between the HEUA and the BBU transmits the monitoring information collected by the HEUA to the BBU. 9.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU The monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU connects the CMUA to the BBU and transmits the monitoring signals collected by the CMUA to the BBU. 9.16 EMUA Monitoring Signal Cable This section describes the EMUA monitoring signal cable. It transmits monitoring signals from the EMUA to the BBU. This cable is delivered with the EMUA. 9.17 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC) The monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the power fault alarms on the PSU. 9.18 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC) The in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the in-position status of the PSU. 9.19 BBU Alarm Cable The BBU alarm cable transmits alarm signals from an external alarm device to the BBU. 9.20 GPS Clock Signal Cable The GPS clock signal cable is an optional cable that transmits GPS clock signals from the GPS antenna system to the BBU. The GPS clock signals serve as the clock reference of the BBU.

9-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

9 BBU3900 Cables

9.1 List of BBU3900 Cables


This describes the BBU3900 cables. The BBU3900 cables are the PGND cable, BBU power cable, E1/T1 cable, E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable, FE/GE cable, FE/GE surge protection transfer cable, interconnection cable between FE electrical ports, interconnection cable between FE optical ports, CPRI optical cable, monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU, monitoring signal cable between HEUA and BBU, monitoring signal cable for the EMUA, monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC), in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC), BBU alarm cable and GPS clock signal cable. Table 9-1 describes the List of BBU3900 Cables. Table 9-1 List of BBU3900 Cables Cable One End Connector 9.2 PGND Cable 9.3 BBU Power Cable OT terminal (6mm2, M4) 3V3 connector 3V3 connector Installation Position BBU/ Grounding bolt BBU/UPEU/ PWR BBU/UPEU/ PWR The Other End Connector OT terminal (6mm2, M8) OT terminal (6mm2, M4) Easy Power Receptacle (Pressfit Type) Connector The connector needs to be made on site according to the field requirements. DB25 connector Installation Position Nearest grounding bar DCDU/LOAD6 EPS/LOAD1

9.5 E1/T1 Cable

DB26 connector

E1/T1 port on the GTMU or UELP or WMPT or UTRP in the BBU E1/T1 port on the GTMU or WMPT or UTRP in the BBU BBU/UFLP/ FE0 port at the OUTSIDE side BBU/GTMU or WMPT/FE0 FE/GE port on the UTRP in the BBU

Port on the transmission device

9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable 9.7 FE/GE Cable

DB26 connector

BBU/UELP/ INSIDE

RJ-45 connector

RJ-45 connector

Port on the transmission device

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-3

9 BBU3900 Cables

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Cable

One End Connector Installation Position BBU/GTMU or WMPT/FE0 FE/GE port on the UTRP in the BBU FE/GE port on the LMPT in the BBU

The Other End Connector RJ-45 connector Installation Position BBU/UFLP/FE0 port at the INSIDE side

9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable

RJ-45 connector

9.9 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports 9.10 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable 9.12 CPRI Optical Cable 9.13 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the APMI and the BBU 9.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the HEUA and the BBU

RJ-45 connector

BBU/WMPT/ FE0

RJ-45 connector

BBU/GTMU/ FE0

LC connector

BBU/WMPT/ FE1

LC connector

BBU/GTMU/ FE1

LC connector

BBU/WMPT or GTMU/FE1 BBU/GTMU or WBBP/CPRI BBU/UPEU or UEIU/MON1

FC/SC/LC connector DLC connector

Port on the transmission device RRU/CPRI_W

DLC connector

RJ-45 connector

Twisted pair

APMI/TX+, TX-, RX+, RX-

RJ-45 connector

BBU/UPEU or UEIU/MON

RJ-45 connector

HEUA/COM_IN

9-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

9 BBU3900 Cables

Cable

One End Connector Installation Position BBU/UPEU or UEIU/MON1

The Other End Connector RJ-45 connector Installation Position CMUA/ COM_IN

9.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU 9.16 EMUA Monitoring Signal Cable 9.17 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC) 9.18 InPosition Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC) 9.19 BBU Alarm Cable 9.20 GPS Clock Signal Cable

RJ-45 connector

RJ-45 connector

BBU/UPEU/ MON1

DB9 male connector

EMUA/RS-485 port

RJ-45 connector

BBU/UPEU or UEIU/ EXT_ALM0

Cord end terminal

PSU(DC/DC)/ ALM

RJ-45 connector

BBU/UPEU or UEIU/ EXT_ALM1

RJ-45 connector

PSU(DC/DC)/ PRESENT

RJ-45 connector

BBU/UPEU or UEIU/ EXT_ALM BBU/WMPT or USCU/GPS

RJ-45 connector

Port on the external monitoring device GPS surge protector

SMA male connector

N-type female connector

9.2 PGND Cable


The PGND cable ensures the grounding of the BBU.

Structure
The green and yellow PGND cable is a single cable with a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2. Both ends of the cable are OT terminals. If you prepare the cable by yourself, it is recommended that you use a copper-based cable with a minimum cross-sectional area of 6 mm2. Figure 9-1 shows the PGND cable.
Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9-5

9 BBU3900 Cables

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 9-1 PGND cable

(1) OT terminal (6 mm2, M4)

9.3 BBU Power Cable


This section describes the BBU power cable. Either -48 V power cable or +24 V power cable can be used, depending on the power supply scenario.

Exterior
The BBU power cable depends on the type of the cabinet containing the BBU, because different types of cabinet use different power supplies. When the power supply device is the DCDU or PDU, the BBU power cable has a 3V3 connector at one end and bare wires at the other end. Based on the connector of the power distribution device, appropriate terminals are added to the bare wire end on site. Figure 9-2 shows the BBU power cable with OT terminals at the bare wire end as an example. Figure 9-2 BBU power cable (1)

(1) 3V3 connector

(2) OT terminal (6 mm2, M4)

NOTE

There are two wires in the -48 V power cable with a blue wire and a black wire. The +24 V power cable and the -48 V power cable have the same exterior, but they differ in color. The +24 V power cable has a red wire and a black wire.

When the power supply device is the EPS, the BBU power cable has a 3V3 connector at one end and an easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector at the other end. Figure 9-3 shows the BBU power cable.

9-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

9 BBU3900 Cables

Figure 9-3 BBU power cable (2)

(1) Easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector

(2) 3V3 power connector

Pin Assignment
The power cable is a 2-wire cable. Table 9-2 and Table 9-3 describe the pin assignment for the wires of the power cable. Table 9-2 Pin assignment for the wires of the -48 V power cable Pin on the 3V3 Connector A1 A2 A3 Color Blue Black Description -48 V GND

Table 9-3 Pin assignment for the wires of the +24 V power cable Pin on the 3V3 Connector A1 A2 A3 Color Red Black Description +24 V GND

9.4 BBU Power cable(OMB)


The BBU power cable in the OMB is used to supply -48 V DC power to the BBU and HEUA. The DC OMB and AC OMB require different power cables between the BBU and the HEUA.

Appearance
Figure 9-4 shows the appearance of power cable(AC OMB).

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-7

9 BBU3900 Cables

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 9-4 Appearance of power cable(AC OMB)

(1) 3V3 power connector for the BBU

(2) H4 connector

(3) 3V3 power connector for the HEUA

Figure 9-5 shows the appearance of power cable(DC OMB). Figure 9-5 Appearance of power cable(DC OMB)

(1) 3V3 power connector

(2) OT terminal

9.5 E1/T1 Cable


The E1/T1 cable connects the BBU to the external transmission device and transmits baseband signals.

Exterior
The E1/T1 cables are classified into two types: 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable and 120-ohm E1 twisted pair cable. One end of the E1/T1 cable is a DB26 male connector. The connector at the other end of the cable should be made on site according to site requirements. Figure 9-6 shows an E1/T1 cable.
9-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

9 BBU3900 Cables

Figure 9-6 E1/T1 cable

(1) DB26 male connector

Table 9-4 describes the connectors of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable. Table 9-4 Connectors of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable Cable 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable One End DB26 male connector The other End L9 male connector L9 female connector SMB female connector BNC male connector SMZ male connector SMZ female connector

Pin Assignment
Table 9-5 and Table 9-6 describe the pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 cable.
NOTE

In Table 9-5, "Tip" refers to a wire in the E1 coaxial cable, and "Ring" refers to an external conductor of the cable.

Table 9-5 Pin assignment for the wires of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable Pins of the DB26 Male Connector X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5
Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Wire Type Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip

Coaxial Series No. 1

Cable Label RX1+ RX1-

RX2+ RX2-

RX3+
9-9

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9 BBU3900 Cables

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Pins of the DB26 Male Connector X1.6 X1.7 X1.8 X1.19 X1.20 X1.21 X1.22 X1.23 X1.24 X1.25 X1.26

Wire Type Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring

Coaxial Series No.

Cable Label RX3-

RX4+ RX4-

TX1+ TX1-

TX2+ TX2-

TX3+ TX3-

TX4+ TX4-

Table 9-6 Pin assignment for the wires of the 120-ohm E1 twisted pair cable Pins of the DB26 Male Connector X.1 X.2 X.3 X.4 X.5 X.6 X.7 X.8 X.19 X.20 X.21 X.22 X.23 X.24 Wire Color Blue White Orange White Green White Brown White Gray White Blue Red Orange Red Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Wire Type Twisted pair Cable Labels RX1+ RX1RX2+ RX2RX3+ RX3RX4+ RX4TX1+ TX1TX2+ TX2TX3+ TX3-

9-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

9 BBU3900 Cables

Pins of the DB26 Male Connector X.25 X.26

Wire Color Green Red

Wire Type Twisted pair

Cable Labels TX4+ TX4-

9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable


This section describes the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable connecting the UELP to the transmission board. This cable is optional.

Exterior
The E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable has a DB26 male connector at one end and a DB25 male connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 9-7. Figure 9-7 E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable

(1) DB25 male connector

(2) DB26 male connector

Pin Assignment
Table 9-7 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable. Table 9-7 Pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable Pin on the DB26 Male Connector X1.20 X1.19 X1.4 X1.3 X1.22 X1.21
Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Type Twisted pair cable

Pin on the DB25 Male Connector X2.2 X2.3

Twisted pair cable

X2.4 X2.5

Twisted pair cable

X2.6 X2.7
9-11

9 BBU3900 Cables

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Pin on the DB26 Male Connector X1.6 X1.5 X1.24 X1.23 X1.8 X1.7 X1.1 X1.2 X1.25 X1.26

Type Twisted pair cable

Pin on the DB25 Male Connector X2.8 X2.9

Twisted pair cable

X2.10 X2.11

Twisted pair cable

X2.12 X2.13

Twisted pair cable

X2.14 X2.15

Twisted pair cable

X2.24 X2.25

9.7 FE/GE Cable


The FE/GE cable connects the BBU to the transmission device through routing devices and transmits baseband signals.
NOTE

The maximum length of the FE/GE cable for remote connection is 100 m.

Exterior
The FE/GE cable is a shielded straight-through cable. It has an RJ-45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 9-8. Figure 9-8 FE/GE cable

(1) RJ-45 connector

Pin Assignment
Table 9-8 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE cable.

9-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

9 BBU3900 Cables

Table 9-8 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE cable Pin on the RJ-45 Connector X1.2 X1.1 X1.6 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5 X1.8 X1.7 Wire Color Orange White and orange Green White and green Blue White and blue Brown White and brown Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Wire Type Twisted pair Pin on the RJ-45 Connector X2.2 X2.1 X2.6 X2.3 X2.4 X2.5 X2.8 X2.7

9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable


The FE/GE surge protection transfer cable is an optional cable that connects the main control board to the UFLP.

Exterior
The FE/GE surge protection transfer cable has an RJ-45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 9-9. Figure 9-9 FE/GE surge protection transfer cable

(1) RJ-45 connector

Pin Assignment
Table 9-9 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-13

9 BBU3900 Cables

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Table 9-9 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable Pin on the RJ-45 Connector X1.2 X1.1 X1.6 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5 X1.8 X1.7 Wire Color Orange White Green White Blue White Brown White Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Wire Type Twisted pair Pin on the RJ-45 Connector X2.2 X2.1 X2.6 X2.3 X2.4 X2.5 X2.8 X2.7

9.9 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports


The cable between two FE electrical ports connects the GTMU and the WMPT to implement IP transmission.

Structure
The cable between two FE electrical ports has an RJ-45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 9-10. Figure 9-10 Cable between two FE electrical ports

(1) RJ-45 connector

9.10 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports


The cable between two FE optical ports connects the GTMU and the WMPT to implement IP transmission.

Structure
The cable between two FE optical ports has an LC connector at each end, as shown in Figure 9-11.
9-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

9 BBU3900 Cables

Figure 9-11 Cable between two FE optical ports

(1) LC connector

9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable


The FE/GE optical cable is used to transmit optical signals between the BBU3900 and the transmission device. This cable is optional.

Exterior
The FE/GE optical cable has an LC connector at one end and an FC connector, SC connector, or LC connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 9-12, Figure 9-13, and Figure 9-14 respectively. Figure 9-12 FE/GE optical cable (FC and LC connectors)

Figure 9-13 FE/GE optical cable (SC and LC connectors)

Figure 9-14 FE/GE optical cable (LC and LC connectors)

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-15

9 BBU3900 Cables

BBU3900 Hardware Description

CAUTION
When connecting the BBU3900 and the transmission device using the FE/GE optical cable, adhere to the following rules: l l The TX port on the BBU3900 is connected to the RX port on the transmission device. The RX port on the BBU3900 is connected to the TX port on the transmission device.

9.12 CPRI Optical Cable


The CPRI optical cable transmits CPRI signals between the BBU and the RRU or between RRUs.

Exterior
The CPRI optical cable is categorized into the multi-mode optical cable and single-mode optical cable. When the distance between the BBU and the RRU is shorter than 100 m, a multi-mode optical cable is required. When the distance between the BBU and the RRU is longer than 100 m, a single-mode optical cable is required. A single-mode optical cable connects the BBU to the ODF and the ODF to the RRU to transmit CPRI signals. A multi-mode optical cable is a multi-mode cable with a DLC connector at each end. Figure 9-15 shows the multi-mode optical cable. Figure 9-15 Multi-mode optical cable

(1) DLC connector

(2) Branch cable

(3) Label on the branch cable

When a multi-mode optical cable is used for connection between the BBU and RRU, the branch cables on the BBU side and RRU side are 0.34 m and 0.03 m long respectively. When a multimode optical cable is used for connection between RRUs, the branch cables on both RRU sides are 0.03 m long. A single-mode optical cable has a DLC connector at one end and two FC connectors at the other end, as shown in Figure 9-16. Figure 9-16 Single-mode optical cable

(1) DLC connector (3) Label on the branch cable

(2) Branch cable (4) FC connector

9-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

9 BBU3900 Cables

When a single-mode optical cable is used for connection between the BBU and the ODF, the branch cables on the BBU side and ODF side are 0.34 m and 0.8 m long respectively. When a single-mode optical cable is used for connection between the ODF and RRU, the branch cables on the BBU side and ODF side are 0.03 m and 0.8 m long respectively.
NOTE

The CPRI optical cable must be connected to the optical module in the CPRI port on the BBU or RRU. The multi-mode optical cable and single-mode optical cable are used for the multi-mode optical module and singlemode optical module respectively.

Pin Assignment
Table 9-10, Table 9-11, and Table 9-12 describe the labels and recommended connections for the branch cables of the CRPI optical cable. Table 9-10 Labels and recommended connections for the branch cables of the multi-mode optical cable between the BBU and RRU Label 1A 1B 2A 2B Color Orange Gray Orange Gray Installation Position CPRI RX port on the RRU CPRI TX port on the RRU TX port on the BBU RX port on the BBU

Table 9-11 Labels and recommended connections for the branch cables of the multi-mode optical cable between RRUs Label 1A 1B 2A 2B Color Orange Gray Orange Gray Installation Position CPRI RX port on the RRU 1 CPRI TX port on the RRU 1 CPRI TX port on the RRU 0 CPRI RX port on the RRU 0

Table 9-12 Labels and recommended connections for the branch cables of the single-mode optical cable and recommended connections Label 1A Color Yellow Installation Position RX port on the BBU or CPRI RX port on the RRU

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-17

9 BBU3900 Cables

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Label 1B 2A 2B

Color Blue Yellow Blue

Installation Position TX port on the BBU or CPRI TX port on the RRU ODF ODF

9.13 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the APMI and the BBU
This describes the monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU. It transmits the environment monitoring signals of the power cabinet to the BBU.

Structure
The monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU has an RJ-45 connector at one end and four bare wires at the other end. Figure 9-17 shows the monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU. Figure 9-17 Monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU

Pin Assignment
Table 9-13 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU. Table 9-13 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU Pin on the RJ-45 Connector X1.1 X1.2 X1.4
9-18

Color

X2 to X5 Ends

Description

Terminal on the APMI TX+ TX-

White Orange Blue

X2 X3 X4

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

RX+
Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BBU3900 Hardware Description

9 BBU3900 Cables

Pin on the RJ-45 Connector X1.5

Color

X2 to X5 Ends

Description

Terminal on the APMI RX-

White

X5

9.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the HEUA and the BBU
The monitoring signal cable between the HEUA and the BBU transmits the monitoring information collected by the HEUA to the BBU.

Appearance
Figure 9-18 shows the monitoring signal cable between the HEUA and the BBU. Figure 9-18 Monitoring signal cable between the HEUA and the BBU

(1) RJ-45 connector

Pin Assignment
Table 9-14 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the HEUA and the BBU. Table 9-14 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the HEUA and the BBU X1 End X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.6 X1.5 X1.4 X1.7
Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

X2 End X2.1 X2.2 X2.3 X2.6 X2.5 X2.4 X2.7

Wire Color White Orange White Green White Blue White

Wire Type Twisted pair

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

Twisted pair
9-19

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9 BBU3900 Cables

BBU3900 Hardware Description

X1 End X1.8

X2 End X2.8

Wire Color Brown

Wire Type

9.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU
The monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU connects the CMUA to the BBU and transmits the monitoring signals collected by the CMUA to the BBU.

Exterior
Figure 9-19 shows the monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU. Figure 9-19 Monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU

(1) RJ-45 connector

Pin Assignment
Table 9-15 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU. Table 9-15 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU X1 End X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.6 X1.5 X1.4 X1.7
9-20

X2 End X2.1 X2.2 X2.3 X2.6 X2.5 X2.4 X2.7

Wire Color White Orange White Green White Blue White

Wire Type Twisted pair

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

Twisted pair
Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BBU3900 Hardware Description

9 BBU3900 Cables

X1 End X1.8

X2 End X2.8

Wire Color Brown

Wire Type

9.16 EMUA Monitoring Signal Cable


This section describes the EMUA monitoring signal cable. It transmits monitoring signals from the EMUA to the BBU. This cable is delivered with the EMUA.

Exterior
Figure 9-20 shows the EMUA monitoring signal cable. Figure 9-20 EMUA monitoring signal cable

(1) RJ-45 connector

(2) DB9 male connector

Pin Assignment
Table 9-16 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the EMUA monitoring signal cable. Table 9-16 Pin assignment for the wires of the EMUA monitoring signal cable Pin on the RJ-45 Connector X1.1 X1.2 X1.5 X1.4 Pin on the DB9 Male Connector X2.3 X2.7 X2.6 X2.2 Color Description Terminal on the APMI TX+ TXTwisted pair RXRX+

White Orange White Blue

Twisted pair

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-21

9 BBU3900 Cables

BBU3900 Hardware Description

9.17 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)


The monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the power fault alarms on the PSU.

Structure
Figure 9-21 shows the Monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC). Figure 9-21 Monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)

Pin Assignment
Table 9-17 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC). Table 9-17 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) X1 End X1.2 X1.1 X1.6 X1.3 X1.4 X1.5 X1.8 X1.7 Wire Color Blue White Orange White Green White Brown White Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Wire Type Twisted pair

9.18 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)


The in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the in-position status of the PSU.

Exterior
Figure 9-22 shows the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC).
9-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

9 BBU3900 Cables

Figure 9-22 In-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)

(1) RJ-45 connector

Pin Assignment
Table 9-18 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC). Table 9-18 Pin assignment for the wires of the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) X1 End X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.6 X1.5 X1.4 X1.7 X1.8 X2 End X2.1 X2.2 X2.3 X2.6 X2.5 X2.4 X2.7 X2.8 Wire Color White Orange White Green White Blue White Brown Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Wire Type Twisted pair

9.19 BBU Alarm Cable


The BBU alarm cable transmits alarm signals from an external alarm device to the BBU.

Exterior
The BBU alarm cable has an RJ-45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 9-23. However, an RJ-45 connector at one end may be removed, and an appropriate terminal may be added according to the field requirements.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-23

9 BBU3900 Cables

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 9-23 BBU alarm cable

(1) RJ-45 connector

Pin Assignment
Table 9-19 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the BBU alarm cable. Table 9-19 Pin assignment for the wires of the BBU alarm cable BBU Alarm Port Pin on the RJ45 Connecto r at One End X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.6 X1.5 X1.4 X1.7 X1.8 EXTALM0 X1.1 X1.2 Wire Color Wire Type Pin on the RJ45 Connecto r at the Other End X2.1 X2.2 Twisted pair X2.3 X2.6 Twisted pair X2.5 X2.4 Twisted pair X2.7 X2.8 Twisted pair X2.1 X2.2 Description

EXTALM1

White and orange Orange White and green Green White and blue Blue White and brown Brown White and orange Orange

Twisted pair

Boolean value input 4+ Boolean value input 4(GND) Boolean value input 5+ Boolean value input 5(GND) Boolean value input 6+ Boolean value input 6(GND) Boolean value input 7+ Boolean value input 7(GND) Boolean value input 0+ Boolean value input 0(GND)

9-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

9 BBU3900 Cables

BBU Alarm Port

Pin on the RJ45 Connecto r at One End X1.3 X1.6 X1.5 X1.4 X1.7 X1.8

Wire Color

Wire Type

Pin on the RJ45 Connecto r at the Other End X2.3 X2.6

Description

White and green Green White and blue Blue White and brown Brown

Twisted pair

Boolean value input 1+ Boolean value input 1(GND) Boolean value input 2+ Boolean value input 2(GND) Boolean value input 3+ Boolean value input 3(GND)

Twisted pair

X2.5 X2.4

Twisted pair

X2.7 X2.8

9.20 GPS Clock Signal Cable


The GPS clock signal cable is an optional cable that transmits GPS clock signals from the GPS antenna system to the BBU. The GPS clock signals serve as the clock reference of the BBU.

Exterior
The GPS clock signal cable has an SMA male connector at one end and an N-type female connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 9-24. Figure 9-24 GPS clock signal cable

(1) SMA male connector

(2) N-type female connector

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-25

BBU3900 Hardware Description

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

10

Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

About This Chapter


This describes the auxiliary devices of the BBU3900. The devices consist of the EMUA and SLPU. 10.1 EMUA The Environment Monitoring Unit (EMUA) monitors the internal environment of the cabinet and reports related alarms. 10.2 OMB The Outdoor Mini Box (OMB) is an outdoor BBU subrack, which is used outdoors. The OMB cabinet is equipped with the BBU, AC/DC power equipment, DCDU and transmission equipment. The OMB cabinet is easy to install and maintain. The cable distribution for internal modules is convenient. The OMB cabinet has good waterproof and dustproof performance, and the grounding function. In addition, the OMB cabinet provides the protection against moisture, mould, and salt fog damage. 10.3 IMB03 The Indoor Mini Box (IMB03) is an indoor subrack with a small capacity. It houses a built-in BBU, AC/DC power equipment, DCDU, or other power equipment. 10.4 DCDU-03 The Direct Current Distribution Unit-03 (DCDU-03) supplies DC power to each component in the cabinet. The height of the DCDU-03 is 1 U. It can be classified into the DCDU-03B and DCDU-03C according to the configured MCBs and application scenarios. The two models have the same exterior, engineering specifications, and ports. 10.5 AC/DC Power Equipment The AC/DC power equipment consists of the 4815 power system and 2-DC-input power distribution box. The equipment is used to lead 220 V AC input power into the cabinet, convert the 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power through the AC/DC PSUs, and supply -48 V DC power to the components in the cabinet. 10.6 SLPU The signal lightning protection unit (SLPU), which can be optionally configured with the UFLP, UELP, or USLP2, provides the signal surge protection.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-1

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

10.1 EMUA
The Environment Monitoring Unit (EMUA) monitors the internal environment of the cabinet and reports related alarms. The EMUA is connected to the main equipment through alarm cables, monitoring the environment information of the equipment room and cabinet. The EMUA monitors the following items: l l l Environment such as the temperature and humidity, water damage, and smoke Intrusion status through the infrared equipment and door status sensor Power distribution

For details about the structure and functions of the EMUA, see the EMUA User Guide.

10.2 OMB
The Outdoor Mini Box (OMB) is an outdoor BBU subrack, which is used outdoors. The OMB cabinet is equipped with the BBU, AC/DC power equipment, DCDU and transmission equipment. The OMB cabinet is easy to install and maintain. The cable distribution for internal modules is convenient. The OMB cabinet has good waterproof and dustproof performance, and the grounding function. In addition, the OMB cabinet provides the protection against moisture, mould, and salt fog damage.

Appearance
Figure 10-1 shows the OMB cabinet. Figure 10-1 Appearance of the OMB(Unit: mm)

10-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Functions
The functions of the OMB cabinet are as follows: l l l l l l l l Providing 3 U installation space for the distributed BTS. Supporting the AC input modes of 220 V single-phase, 110 V dual-live two-phase. Supporting -48 V DC power input. Providing secure and reliable surge protection and inductive lightning protection through the AC surge protection box (optional). Connecting the grounding bus of the cabinet, PGND cable of the surge protector, and PGND cables of other devices to the grounding busbar of the cabinet. Dissipating heat by using the core of the heat exchanger and outer and inner air circulation fans and enabling excellent heat dissipation. Protecting itself against dust, adapting to different environments even though in adverse air conditions. Being capable of working with the distributed or separated base stations and meeting the requirements in different scenarios.

Structure
There are two types of OMBs, that is, the AC OMB and DC OMB. The AC OMB houses the HEUA, BBU, AC/DC power equipment, and AC surge protection box, as shown in Figure 10-2.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-3

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 10-2 Hardware structure of the AC OMB

(1) HEUA

(2) BBU

(3) AC/DC power equipment

(4) AC surge protection box

The DC OMB houses the HEUA, BBU, and DCDU-03B, as shown in Figure 10-3.

10-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Figure 10-3 Hardware structure of the DC OMB

(1) HEUA

(2) BBU

(3) DCDU-03B

Specifications
Table 10-1 lists the specifications of the OMB. Table 10-1 Specifications of the OMB Item Dimensions Weight Specification 600 mm x 240 mm x 390 mm (height x width x depth) OMB subrack: 15 kg AC OMB: 25 kg DC OMB: 22.5kg

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-5

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Item Temperature

Specification Without solar radiation: -40C to +50C Short-term working at 50C to 55C
NOTE The short-term work indicates that the continuous work does not exceed 96 hours or the accumulated working time in a year does not exceed 15 days.

Relative humidity

5% to 100%

10.3 IMB03
The Indoor Mini Box (IMB03) is an indoor subrack with a small capacity. It houses a built-in BBU, AC/DC power equipment, DCDU, or other power equipment.

Exterior
Figure 10-4 shows an IMB03. Figure 10-4 IMB03

(1) Front cover plate of the IMB03 (3) Warning label to avoid treading

(2) Protection cover (4) Slots of internal modules in the IMB03

Functions
The IMB03 performs the following functions: l
10-6

Provides a 3 U space for a distributed base station.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

l l l l

Supports 220 V single-phase AC input and 110 V dual-live-wire AC input. Supports power input of -48 V DC. Supports various installation modes, including the wall-mounting mode, rack-mounting mode, and combined-with-IFS06 mode. Provides a well-developed function of heat dissipation and facilitates cabling of internal modules.

Structure
There are two types of IMB03, that is, the DC IMB03 and AC IMB03. A DC IMB03 houses the BBU and DCDU-03B, as shown in Figure 10-5. Figure 10-5 DC IMB03

(1) DCDU-03B

(2) BBU

An AC IMB03 houses a BBU and AC/DC power equipment, as shown in Figure 10-6.
Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-7

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 10-6 AC IMB03

(1) AC/DC power equipment

(2) BBU

Specifications
Table 10-2 lists the specifications of the IMB03. Table 10-2 Specifications of the IMB03 Item Dimensions Weight Specification 560 mm (22.05 in.) x 425 mm (16.73 in.) x 180 mm (7.09 in.) (height x width x depth) 10 kg

10-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

10.4 DCDU-03
The Direct Current Distribution Unit-03 (DCDU-03) supplies DC power to each component in the cabinet. The height of the DCDU-03 is 1 U. It can be classified into the DCDU-03B and DCDU-03C according to the configured MCBs and application scenarios. The two models have the same exterior, engineering specifications, and ports.

Exterior
Figure 10-7 shows the DCDU-03. Figure 10-7 DCDU-03

Functions
The DCDU-03 provides nine -48 V DC outputs and different MCB configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of the scenarios of distributed and separated base stations. Table 10-3 describes the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03. Table 10-3 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03 DCDU Model DC Output Terminal Power Consumpti on Equipment RRU BBU and the transmission equipment of the customer MCB Specificati on 20 A 12 A MCB Quantity Applicatio n Scenario

DCDU-03B

LOAD0 to LOAD5 LOAD6 to LOAD8

6 3

Distributed base station/ Mini base station

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-9

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

DCDU Model

DC Output Terminal

Power Consumpti on Equipment Transmissio n equipment of the customer BBU Transmissio n equipment of the customer Fan box

MCB Specificati on 12 A

MCB Quantity

Applicatio n Scenario

DCDU-03C

LOAD0 to LOAD5

LOAD6 LOAD7

12 A 6A

1 1

Separated macro base station in the -48 V DC power supply/ Transmissio n cabinet

LOAD8

6A

Ports
Figure 10-8 describes the ports on the panel of the DCDU-03. Figure 10-8 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-03

Table 10-4 describes the ports on the panel of the DCDU-03.

10-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Table 10-4 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-03 Port DC input terminal Specification Supports the M6 2-hole OT terminal Cross-Sectional Area (Unit: mm2) l DCDU-03B: 25 l DCDU-03C: 25 Remarks When the DCDU-03 is used in the transmission cabinet, the cross-sectional area of the input power cable is 4 mm2. l Three rows of wiring terminals for outputs: NEG(-), RTN(+), and PGND, where, the last three pairs of the PGND wiring terminals support the grounding of the M4 2-hole OT terminals, which are marked in red in Figure 10-8 l Supports the output power cable with a maximum crosssectional area of 6 mm2

DC output terminal

LOAD0 to LOAD8 (from left to right) LOAD0 to LOAD8

2.5

10.5 AC/DC Power Equipment


The AC/DC power equipment consists of the 4815 power system and 2-DC-input power distribution box. The equipment is used to lead 220 V AC input power into the cabinet, convert the 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power through the AC/DC PSUs, and supply -48 V DC power to the components in the cabinet.

Appearance
Figure 10-9 shows the AC/DC power equipment. Figure 10-9 AC/DC power equipment

(1) AC power supply socket (3) Wiring terminal for the transmission equipment

(2) Wiring terminal for the RRU (4) Power distribution control switch for the RRU

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-11

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900


(5) Power distribution control switch for the transmission (6) Rectifier equipment (7) Monitoring port (9) DC output port LOAD2

BBU3900 Hardware Description

(8) DC output port LOAD1 (10) Output port for the batteries BATT

Interface
Table 10-5 describes the panel of the AC/DC power equipment. Table 10-5 Panel of the AC/DC power equipment Interface Type AC power supply socket Monitoring port Label INPUT RS232 RS485 COM DC output port LOAD1 LOAD2 Description AC power supply socket Reserved port Monitoring port for the rectifier Reserved port Output port for the BBU and HEUA(10A) Output port for the transmission equipment (20A) Output port for the batteries (20A) Wiring terminal for the RRU power cable(12A) Wiring terminal for the power cable for the transmission equipment(4A) Connector Type 3-pin male connector RJ-45 connector H4 connector H4 connector

BAT DC output wiring terminal RRU TM

H4 connector OT terminal OT terminal

LED
Table 10-6 describes the LEDs on the panel of the rectifier in the AC/DC power equipment. Table 10-6 LEDs on the panel of the rectifier Label RUN
10-12

Color Green

Name Run LED

Status ON

Description The rectifier is running properly.


Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BBU3900 Hardware Description

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Label

Color

Name

Status OFF

Description An error occurs during the running of the rectifier. Output overcurrent alarm or overtemperature alarm The communication is disrupted. The rectifier is running properly. Fan faults, output overvoltage, and external short circuit. The rectifier is running properly.

ALARM

Yellow

Alarm LED

ON Blinking OFF

FAULT

Red

Fault LED

ON OFF

Table 10-7 describes the LEDs on the panel of the monitoring module in the AC/DC power equipment. Table 10-7 LEDs on the panel of the monitoring module Label RUN Color Green Name Run LED Status Blinking at 0.5 Hz Blinking at 4 Hz ALM Red Alarm LED ON OFF Description The module is running properly. The module is not faulty but unable to communicate with the PMU properly. An alarm is generated. No alarm is generated.

DIP Switches
Figure 10-10 shows the DIP switches on the PMU.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-13

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 10-10 DIP switches on the PMU

Table 10-8 describes the settings of the DIP switches on the PMU. Table 10-8 Settings of the DIP switches on the PMU No. 1~5 Function Defines the communication address of the PMU Operation (1) Switches 1 to 5 correspond to bits 0 to 4. ON: 1, OFF: 0 For example: to set the address of PMU to 3, set switches 3 to 5 as OFF. (2) Default setting before delivery: 1 (BIT0), ON 2 (BIT1), ON 3 (BIT2), OFF 4 (BIT3), OFF 5 (BIT4), OFF

10-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

No. 6

Function Selects baud rate for communicating with the BTS

Operation Set as ON, indicating that the baud rate is 9600. (If it is set as OFF, the baud rate is 19200.) Set as OFF

7 and 8

Reserved and not defined

10.6 SLPU
The signal lightning protection unit (SLPU), which can be optionally configured with the UFLP, UELP, or USLP2, provides the signal surge protection. 10.6.1 Exterior of SLPU The SLPU has a case structure, which requires a 19-inch wide and 1 U high space. 10.6.2 UELP Each Universal E1/T1 Lightning Protection Unit (UELP) provides surge protection for four paths of E1/T1 signals. 10.6.3 UFLP The universal FE/GE lightning protection (UFLP) board is a universal FE surge protection unit, each UFLP supports 2-way FE surge protection. 10.6.4 USLP2 The Universal Signal Lightning Protection Unit Type 2 (USLP2) is a dry contact surge protection unit. It is optional and can be installed in the SLPU.

10.6.1 Exterior of SLPU


The SLPU has a case structure, which requires a 19-inch wide and 1 U high space. Figure 10-11 shows the SLPU. Figure 10-11 SLPU

10.6.2 UELP
Each Universal E1/T1 Lightning Protection Unit (UELP) provides surge protection for four paths of E1/T1 signals.

Panel
Figure 10-12 shows the panel of the UELP.
Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10-15

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

Figure 10-12 UELP panel

Ports
Table 10-9 lists the ports of the UELP. Table 10-9 Ports of the UELP Label INSIDE OUTSIDE Connector DB25 connector DB26 connector Description Connected to the board for transmission in the base station Connected to the external transmission devices

DIP Switch
The UELP has one DIP switch, which is used to determine whether the receiving end is grounded. The DIP switch has four DIP bits. Figure 10-13 shows the DIP switch on the UELP. Figure 10-13 DIP switch on the UELP

10-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Table 10-10 describes the DIP switch on the UELP. Table 10-10 DIP switch on the UELP DIP Switch S1 Bit Status 1 OFF 2 OFF 3 OFF 4 OFF Not grounded Grounded Description

Other status

NOTE

The 75-ohm E1 cable can be either grounded or not grounded, whereas the 120-ohm E1 cable and the 100ohm T1 cable cannot be grounded.

10.6.3 UFLP
The universal FE/GE lightning protection (UFLP) board is a universal FE surge protection unit, each UFLP supports 2-way FE surge protection.

Panel
Figure 10-14 shows the panel of the UFLP. Figure 10-14 Panel of the UFLP

Ports
Table 10-11 describes the ports on the panel of the UFLP. Table 10-11 Ports on the panel of the UFLP Port Location INSIDE side Label FE0, FE1 Connector Type RJ-45 Description Connected to the board for transmission in the base station Connected to the external transmission devices

OUTSIDE side

FE0, FE1

RJ-45

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-17

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

BBU3900 Hardware Description

10.6.4 USLP2
The Universal Signal Lightning Protection Unit Type 2 (USLP2) is a dry contact surge protection unit. It is optional and can be installed in the SLPU.

Panel
Figure 10-15 shows the panel of the USLP2. Figure 10-15 Panel of the USLP2

Port
There are four output ports and two input ports on the USLP2. Table 10-12 lists the ports on the panel of the USLP2. Table 10-12 Ports on the panel of the USLP2 Label IN0, IN1, IN2, and IN3 OUT0, OUT1 Port Type 4-pin Quantity 4 Description Input ports used to connect the customized alarm devices. Output ports used to connect the EXT-ALM port of the UEIU or UPEU in the cabinet.

RJ45

Figure 10-16 shows the mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2. Figure 10-16 Mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2
OUT0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2

OUT1
3 4 5 6 7 8 4

IN0
3 2 1 4

IN1
3 2 1 4

IN2
3 2 1 4

IN3
3 2 1

Table 10-13 lists the mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2.
10-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

BBU3900 Hardware Description

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Table 10-13 Mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2 Input Label IN0 Pin IN0.1 IN0.2 IN0.3 IN0.4 IN1 IN1.1 IN1.2 IN1.3 IN1.4 IN2 IN2.1 IN2.2 IN2.3 IN2.4 IN3 IN3.1 IN3.2 IN3.3 IN3.4 OUT0 Output Label OUT1 Pin OUT1.1 OUT1.2 OUT1.4 OUT1.5 OUT1.3 OUT1.6 OUT1.7 OUT1.8 OUT0.1 OUT0.2 OUT0.4 OUT0.5 OUT0.3 OUT0.6 OUT0.7 OUT0.8

For details about the application of the USLP2, see 2.3 Configuration of the SLPU.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-19

You might also like